JP7127722B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, pachinko machines and the like are known as one type of gaming machines. A pachinko machine has a game area in which a game is played using game balls, the game balls are movable, and the game balls shot by the shooting means are guided to the game area.

Further, the pachinko machine is provided with specific ball entry means having a specific area into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and the game ball enters the starting ball entry means provided in the game area. Then, when the specific ball entry means is in an open state that allows the game ball to enter the specific area, and the game ball that has entered the specific area enters the special ball entry means in the same area, There is also a special game state that is advantageous to the player (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP-A-11-197312

By the way, as a gaming machine, it is always desired to add a new interest by adopting a new configuration.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can add new interest .

The gaming machine of the present invention is
a state in which the first result is awaited;
a state in which a second result is awaited and
the second result is a more advantageous result for the player than the first result;
Both the first result and the second result may be in a wait state,
teaching that the first result is awaited in a state in which the first result is awaited and the second result is not awaited; a first waiting teaching means capable of teaching that both the first result and the second result are waiting in a state where both are waiting;
without teaching that the first result is awaited in a state in which the first result is awaited and the second result is not awaited, the first result and the second result and a second waiting teaching means capable of teaching that the second result is waiting, not that the first result is waiting, in a state where both are waiting,
Dissolving means for resolving the waiting state of the first result and the waiting state of the second result;
The canceling means is characterized in that it is brought into a stopped state after the operation of canceling the waiting state of the first result and the waiting state of the second result .

According to the present invention, new interest can be added .

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the inner frame and the front frame set. It is a front view showing the configuration of the inner frame, the game board, and the like. It is a rear view showing the configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the inner frame, the back pack unit and the like are opened. It is a block diagram showing the main electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline|summary of the various counters used for game control. 4 is a flowchart showing main processing by a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows starting prize-winning processing. It is a flow chart which shows right or wrong judging processing. 9 is a flow chart showing fluctuation time determination processing. 4 is a flowchart showing through gate passage processing; It is a flow chart which shows entering ball count processing. It is a flow chart which shows a special winning a prize process. It is a flow chart which shows non-special prize-winning processing. It is a flow chart which shows early detection processing. It is a flow chart which shows a kind entry processing. It is a flow chart which shows role product jackpot setting processing. 8 is a flowchart showing first display control processing; 10 is a flowchart showing variable display setting processing; It is a flowchart which shows a discrimination|determination information setting process. It is a flow chart which shows variable winning a prize device control processing. 9 is a flowchart showing end setting processing; It is a flow chart which shows blade member opening and closing processing. 9 is a flowchart showing second display control processing; 10 is a flowchart showing a trigger-responsive unit control process; It is a flowchart which shows a remaining ball monitoring process. It is a flow chart which shows preceding production processing. 4 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing; It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of a payout control device. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing; 4 is a flowchart showing command determination processing; 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing of a sub-controller; It is a flowchart which shows a pending|holding information storage process. It is a front schematic diagram of a central winning unit. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rotator unit; It is a front schematic diagram which shows a route|root distribution apparatus. It is an exploded perspective view of a route sorting device. It is a cross-sectional schematic diagram of the route|root distribution apparatus in another embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram of the route distribution apparatus in another embodiment. It is a schematic plan view and a schematic front view of a route sorting device in another embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram of the route distribution apparatus in another embodiment. It is a schematic plan view and a schematic front view of a route sorting device in another embodiment.

An embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3, etc., the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that constitutes the outer shell of the pachinko machine 10. An inner frame 12 is supported on one side of the outer frame 11 so as to be openable and closable. . As shown in FIG. 6, the outer frame 11 is composed of an upper frame-constituting portion 11a, a lower frame-constituting portion 11b, a left side frame-constituting portion 11c, and a right side frame-constituting portion 11d, which are assembled into a rectangular frame shape as a whole. there is An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left side frame-constituting portion 11c (see FIG. 1). The upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12 are rotatably supported by the upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. A space formed inside the outer frame 11 accommodates the inner frame 12 and the like.

An extension wall portion 83 that protrudes toward the inner side of the outer frame 11 from the vicinity of the rear end in the width direction is formed on the right side frame-constituting portion 11d. The extending wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3 , a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked is provided on the front side of the extending wall portion 83 . A pressing portion 86 that abuts on an inner frame open detection switch 92 (to be described later) protrudes toward the inside of the outer frame 11 from the lower receiving portion 85 . Further, a resin-made curtain plate decoration 87 is attached to the lower side frame-constituting portion 11b. A rib 88 protruding upward is integrally formed in the inner part of the upper surface of the curtain plate decoration 87 . This makes it difficult for a gap to be formed with the inner frame 12 .

As shown in FIG. 3, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically along the left side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front, and the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening/closing axis as the axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly composed of a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially elliptical window hole 39 is formed in the central portion of the resin base 38 .

A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so that it can be opened and closed. As with the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened forward with an opening/closing axis set along the top and bottom on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front. The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers substantially the entire front side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the central portion of the front frame set 14 . Thereby, the game board 30 (game area) attached to the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12 . A detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower tray 15 is provided as a ball receiving tray at the center of the lower portion thereof. can be stored inside. Further, on the front side of the lower tray 15, a ball extracting lever 25 for ejecting game balls from the inside of the lower tray 15 is provided. In addition, a production button 125 with a built-in LED is provided on the left side of the lower plate 15, and by pressing the production button 125, a corresponding production is performed on the decorative pattern display device 42, etc., which will be described later. Or the content of the production is changed.

On the right side of the lower plate 15, a game ball shooting handle (hereinafter simply referred to as a handle) 18 projecting forward is provided. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and an operation amount detection means (variable resistor) (not shown) for detecting an operation amount of an operation portion of the handle 18 . Then, when the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, a game ball is shot by a shooting device 60 as a shooting means, which will be described later, with a force corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. Also, the handle 18 is provided with a firing prohibition button 18a that can be pressed with the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. As shown in FIG. When the shooting prohibition button 18a is pressed, shooting of game balls by the shooting device 60 is prohibited even if the handle 18 is gripped. Therefore, it is possible to rotate the handle 18 while prohibiting the shooting of the game ball, or temporarily stop shooting the game ball while gripping the handle 18.例文帳に追加

An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15 . The upper plate 19 is a ball receiver that temporarily stores game balls and guides them toward a launching device 60 to be described later while aligning them in a row. When the upper tray 19 is filled with game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower tray 15 via a lower tray communication passage 71 and a discharge port 16, which will be described later.

A ball lending button 121 and a returning button 122 are provided on the upper plate 19. - 特許庁As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like, the ball lending button 121 is operated. A rented ball is supplied to the upper tray 19 . On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and return button 122 are unnecessary in a pachinko machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine.

Furthermore, the upper plate 19 is provided with a ball removal button 123 . By pressing the ball removal button 123, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper tray 19 and communicating with the lower tray 15 is opened and stored in the upper tray 19. The game ball is guided (dropped) to the lower tray 15. - 特許庁That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper tray 19 to the lower tray 15 at any time by operating the ball removal button 123 .

Further, the front face of the front frame set 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it. These light emitting means play a role of increasing the effect during the game by changing and controlling the light emitting mode such as lighting and blinking in accordance with the change of the game state such as at the time of a big win or a predetermined ready-to-win state. For example, on the periphery of the window portion 101, an annular illumination portion 102 containing light emitting means such as an LED is provided. In addition, error display lamps 104 are provided on both sides of the ring-shaped decorative portion 102 to light up in the event of a predetermined error. A large number of fine through-holes are formed in the annular illumination portion 102 above each error display lamp 104 corresponding to the speaker SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame set 14. .

A glass unit 137 is attached to the rear side of the front frame set 14 . The glass unit 137 is not a conventional front and rear pair of rectangular plate glasses that are attached separately as a front and rear pair, but is formed in a round shape as a whole and attached after being assembled.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is attached behind the window hole 39 to the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). The game board 30 is attached with its peripheral portion in contact with the back side of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38). Therefore, the substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39 of the resin base 38 .

In addition, a shooting device 60 and a shooting rail for guiding a game ball immediately after being shot from the shooting device 60 are provided at a front lower portion of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, a position below the window hole 39 (game board 30). 61 is attached. In this embodiment, a solenoid type launcher is adopted as the launcher 60 . Above the shooting device 60 is a ball feeding device that guides the game balls guided from the upper tray 19 one by one to the shooting position of the shooting device 60 by driving a built-in drive means (for example, a solenoid). 63 are provided.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board 30 includes a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, first and second starting winning devices 33a and 33b as starting ball winning means, a through gate 34, a central winning unit 37 as specific ball winning means, a special The display device 43 and the like are arranged in through holes formed by router processing, and attached from the front side of the game board 30 by wood screws or the like. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins a prize) in various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the first and second starting winning devices 33a, 33b, etc., it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper tray 19 Alternatively, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the lower tray 15.例文帳に追加For example, if there are 3 balls in the startup winning devices 33a and 33b, 5 balls in the general winning port 31, and 5 balls in the variable winning device 32. 10 game balls are paid out. In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and game balls that do not enter various prize winning ports such as the general winning port 31 are discharged out of the game area through the out port 36. . The game board 30 is also provided with a large number of nails for appropriately distributing and adjusting the falling direction of game balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

Here, the central winning unit 37 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4, 39, 40 and the like. As shown in FIGS. 4 and 39, the central winning unit 37 is provided in the center of the game area (game board 30) and forms a specific area 401 into which game balls moving (flowing down) in the game area can enter. It has a housing 402 that accommodates. A pair of left and right ball entry openings 403 are formed on the left and right sides of the upper part of the housing 402 to serve as entrances for game balls moving in the game area to enter the specific area 401 . In addition, the central winning unit 37 includes a pair of left and right blade members 404 displaceable between a closed position for closing each ball entry opening 403 and an open position for opening them, and a blade solenoid for opening and closing the blade members 404. 405 (see block diagram in FIG. 7). When the blade member 404 is displaced to the closed position and the ball entry opening 403 is closed, the central winning unit 37 is closed and the ball cannot enter the specific area 401 . On the other hand, when the blade member 404 is displaced to the open position and the ball entry opening 403 is opened, the central prize winning unit 37 is opened and entry of the ball into the specific area 401 is permitted.

In addition, although the details will be described later, the blade member 404 has entered the first start-up winning device 33a or the second start-up winning device 33b, and has won a winning lottery based on the entering ball. ), it is opened for a predetermined period of time. Further, in this embodiment, the pair of left and right blade members 404 are configured to operate in synchronism with each other, and when one is in the open position, the other is also in the open position, and one is in the closed position. If so, the other is also in the closed position.

The specific area 401 of the present embodiment includes a route sorting area 406 in which the game ball entered from the entrance opening 403 is first guided, a winner lottery area 407 located below it, and a type lottery located below it. area 408.

In addition, in the winning lottery area 407, the game ball entered in the winning lottery area 407 is randomly guided (divided) to either the type lottery area 408 or outside the game area on the back side of the game board 30. A rotator unit 410 is provided as.

As shown in FIG. 40, the rotary unit 410 includes a unit base 411 fixed to the game board 30, and a substantially annular unit cover 412 attached to the unit base 411 so as to cover the upper surface of the unit base 411. A substantially circular housing recess 413 is formed corresponding to the substantially central portion of the unit cover 412 . Further, the rotator unit 410 includes a substantially disk-shaped rotator 414 rotatably provided inside the housing recess 413, and a rotator motor 415 that rotates the rotator 414 in a fixed direction. In this embodiment, the rotating body 414 is configured to always rotate counterclockwise in a plan view at a constant cycle. The rotating body motor 415 is composed of a stepping motor and is driven and controlled by a pulse signal output from the main controller 261 . Although the details will be described later, the rotor 414 rotates at a constant cycle, but does not rotate at a constant speed.

Rotating body 414 has pocket portions 416 capable of receiving one game ball at each of three locations along its outer peripheral edge. The three pocket portions 416 are classified into two special pocket portions 416a and the other (one) non-special pocket portion 416b. The non-special pocket portion 416 b has a bottom wall portion 417 that opens outward and upward from the rotating body 414 , and the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 417 slopes downward toward the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 414 . there is On the other hand, the special pocket portion 416a is open to the outer peripheral side, the upper side, and the lower side of the rotating body 414, and does not have the bottom wall portion 417 like the non-special pocket portion 416b. In addition, the peripheral portion of the special pocket portion 416a is made of a colored resin material different from that of other portions, thereby making it easy to distinguish between the special pocket portion 416a and the non-special pocket portion 416b. It's becoming

The unit base 411 has a motor installation portion 423 on which the rotating body motor 415 is installed and a rotating body installation portion 424 on which the rotating body 414 is installed. Furthermore, a link mechanism (not shown) having three gears for transmitting the driving force of the rotor motor 415 to the rotor 414 is provided on the lower surface side of the unit base 411 .

The unit cover 412 is installed so as to surround the rotator installation portion 424 of the unit base 411, and includes a substantially cylindrical cylindrical wall portion 431 that forms the housing recess 413 together with the rotator installation portion 424, and the upper edge of the tubular wall portion 431. It has an upper wall portion 432 extending to the outer peripheral side, and a surrounding wall 434 extending upward from the upper edge portion of the cylinder wall portion 431 (the edge portion of the opening on the inner periphery of the upper wall portion 432).

Further, the surrounding wall 434 is provided with a gate portion 435 that communicates between the inner peripheral side and the outer peripheral side of the surrounding wall 434 by forming an opening in a range of about 90 degrees on the front edge side of the housing recess 413 . . Further, on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 432, a substantially annular game ball rolling path 433 is formed on which a game ball can roll. A portion of the game ball rolling path 433 located behind the front edge of the housing recess 413 is inclined downward toward the front and toward the inner peripheral side of the game ball rolling path 433, and the front edge of the housing recess 413 The part located forward of the part is inclined downward toward the rear and the inner peripheral side of the game ball rolling path 433 (left-right direction central part side). For this reason, when the game ball falls onto the game ball rolling path 433, the game ball rolling path 433 is prevented from dropping into the accommodation recess 413 (rotating body 414) from the rear or left and right sides of the accommodation recess 413. , and enter the pocket portion 416 of the rotating body 414 via the gate portion 435 in front of the rotating body 414 .

Note that the unit base 411 is also tilted forward corresponding to the tilt of the unit cover 412, and along with this, the rotating body 414 is also tilted forward, that is, the rotation axis of the rotating body 414 is directed upward. It is installed in a posture that is somewhat inclined forward (a posture that makes it easy for players in front to see).

In addition, the unit base 411 has a safe passage 427 communicating with the type lottery area 408 and an out passage 428 communicating with the outside of the specific area 401 (in this embodiment, the back side of the game board 30 outside the game area). formed. The inlets of the safe passage 427 and the out passage 428 are formed at positions (on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical wall portion 431) through which the rotating body 414 can pass through the rotating body installation portion 424. As shown in FIG.

The game ball entering the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 through the gate portion 435 matches the position of the special pocket portion 416a with the entrance of the safe passage 427 as the rotating body 414 rotates. At this time, the ball falls downward from the special pocket portion 416 a and enters the safe passage 427 .

In addition, when the game ball enters the non-special pocket portion 416b of the rotating body 414 through the gate portion 435, the position of the non-special pocket portion 416b and the entrance of the safe passage 427 along with the rotation of the rotating body 414 Even if matches, the bottom wall portion 417 provided in the non-special pocket portion 416b prevents the game ball stored in the non-special pocket portion 416b from falling (ball entering) into the safe passage 427 (a gap that can fall is formed not).

On the other hand, the out passage 428 is formed wider than the safe passage 427 (up to the outer peripheral side of the rotor 414), and above the out passage 428, the lower portion of the cylindrical wall portion 431 is omitted. . Therefore, when the rotating body 414 further rotates and the positions of the non-special pocket portion 416b containing the game ball and the out passage 428 match, the game ball housed in the non-special pocket portion 416b moves to the out passage. It will be entered in 428.

Also, the safe passage 427 is provided with a special ball entry detection switch 461 as special ball entry detection means for detecting a passing game ball. Then, when the game ball enters the safe path 427 and is detected by the special ball entry detection switch 461, the variable winning device 32 is opened for 30 seconds, or the variable winning device 32 Winning eight game balls is regarded as one round, and the right to generate a big hit state (special game state) in which this is repeated a predetermined number of times is granted. Although details will be described later, in this embodiment, when detection by the special ball detection switch 461 is performed, the jackpot state is not immediately started, but the jackpot state type is determined in the type lottery area 408. If so, a jackpot condition is initiated.

In addition, when a game ball enters the out passage 428, the game ball is discharged outside the game area. is provided. In addition, in this embodiment, when the special ball detection switch 461 or the non-special ball detection switch 462 is detected, 10 game balls are placed on the upper tray 19 (or the lower tray 15). paid out.

The number of game balls to be paid out when the special ball detection switch 461 and the non-special ball detection switch 462 are detected is not particularly limited, and may be, for example, one or zero. It's okay. Also, in this embodiment, the safe passage 427 in which the special entry detection switch 461 is arranged corresponds to the special entry means (second entry means), and the out passage 428 in which the non-special entry detection switch 462 is arranged. corresponds to the non-special entering means (first entering means).

A projecting portion 440 extending from the upper edge portion of the surrounding wall 434 to the inner peripheral side of the surrounding wall 434 is provided at a portion of the surrounding wall 434 corresponding to the upper side of the entrance of the safe passage 427 and the out passage 428. It is The protruding portion 440 is configured to cover, from above, about a half region of the pocket portions 416 (the special pocket portion 416a and the non-special pocket portion 416b) located below the protruding portion 440 on the outer peripheral side of the rotating body 414. . For this reason, another game ball is placed on the upper side of the game ball that entered the predetermined pocket portion 416, and the two game balls that are vertically overlapped are continuously connected to the safe passage 427 or the out passage 428. It is possible to avoid situations in which a game ball enters or jumps over the surrounding wall 434 for some reason and enters directly into the pocket part 416 at a position matching the safe passage 427 and the out passage 428.例文帳に追加

However, in the present embodiment, two of the three pocket portions 416 are the special pocket portions 416a, so the two special pocket portions 416a of the rotating rotating body 414 match the gate portion 435 two consecutive times. When the game balls enter the two special pocket portions 416a at the timing, the game balls enter the safe passage 427 in rapid succession (continuously).

In this embodiment, the entrance of the safe passage 427 is located at the lower right position when the rotating body installation portion 424 is viewed from above, and the entire formation range of the entrance of the safe passage 427 is within the formation range of the gate portion 435. The entrance of the out passage 428 is provided at the upper right position when the rotating body installation portion 424 is viewed from above.

Now, as shown in FIG. 39 and the like, the central winning unit 37 includes a normal path 701 that guides a game ball entering the specific area 401 (route sorting area 406) to the most upstream part of the game ball rolling path 433, A special passage 702 for guiding a game ball that has entered the specific area 401 to the midstream portion of the game ball rolling path 433 is provided. A pair of left and right special passages 702 are provided in this embodiment. Further, in the route sorting area 406, a route sorting device 703 as a route sorting means is provided at a position where a game ball entered from the pair of left and right ball entry openings 403 falls, and a route sorting device 703 is formed below the route sorting device 703. A normal guide part 704 for guiding the game ball to the normal path 701 and a special guide part 705 formed on both left and right sides of the route sorting device 703 for guiding the game ball to the special path 702 are provided. . A switch for detecting a game ball is provided for the special passage 702, and when the switch is detected, an effect (sound effect, liquid crystal display) notifying that the game ball is passing through the special passage 702 is provided. etc.).

As shown in FIGS. 41A and 42, the route sorting device 703 has a shaft hole 712 into which a longitudinally extending shaft pin 711 can be inserted, and is rotatably supported with respect to the shaft pin 711. A substantially cylindrical shaft portion 713 , a first wing portion 714 projecting leftward from the shaft portion 713 , and a second wing portion 715 projecting rightward from the shaft portion 713 . The route sorting device 703 of this embodiment is made of translucent resin.

Further, the route sorting device 703 has a bilaterally symmetrical shape centering on the shaft portion 713, and the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715 protrude from the shaft portion 713 to both the left and right sides. It is configured to be stationary (brought to equilibrium). Furthermore, the guide surfaces 714a and 715a forming the upper surfaces of the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715 of the route sorting device 703 in the reference posture are inclined downward toward both sides and communicate with the special guide portion 705. is configured as

42, the axle pin 711 is supported at its rear end by the rear wall portion of the housing 402 defining the rear portion of the route distribution area 406, and is supported by a transparent front wall portion defining the front portion of the route distribution means 406. The front end is supported by the panel 717 (bearing hole 717a formed in the panel). Although not shown, the rear wall of the housing 402 has a first wing portion 714 and a second wing portion 715 of the route sorting means 406 in the reference posture. The incoming ball ramp and the second incoming ball ramp are provided so as not to come into contact with the route sorting means 406 . In this embodiment, the state in which the route sorting device 703 is in the reference posture corresponds to the second guidance state, and the changed posture in which the route sorting device 703 is tilted from the standard posture (the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715 are up and down). ) corresponds to the first guiding state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 39, the central winning unit 37 has a pair of left and right lead-in passages 718 for guiding the game balls entered from the pair of left and right ball entry openings 403 to the back side of the route sorting area 406, respectively. is provided. More specifically, as the introduction passage 718, the game ball entering the specific area 401 through the first ball entering opening 403a on the left side of the entering ball opening 403 is guided to the upper position of the first wing portion 714. A game in which a ball enters the specific area 401 through the first introduction passage 718a that guides (drops onto the guide surface 714a of the first wing portion 714) and the second ball entry opening 403b on the right side of the ball entry openings 403. A second introduction passage 718b guides the ball to a position above the second wing portion 715 (drops onto the guide surface 715a of the second wing portion 715). In addition, the distance of the first introduction passage 718a and the distance of the second introduction passage 718b are the same, and the game in which the ball is entered into (the entrances of) the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b almost at the same time The balls are ejected from (the exits of) the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b substantially simultaneously.

In addition, in the middle position of each introduction passage 718 (first introduction passage 718a and second introduction passage 718b), an entry ball count switch 437 (hereinafter referred to as first introduction passage 718a) as an entry detection means for detecting passage of game balls Also referred to as a "first incoming ball count switch 437a", the one installed in the second introduction passage 718b is also called a "second incoming ball count switch 437b"). In this embodiment, a game ball that enters the first ball entry opening 403a always passes through the first introduction passage 718a, and a game ball that enters the second ball entry opening 403b always passes through the second introduction passage 718b. A game ball entering the specific area 401 is always detected by either the left or right entering ball count switch 437. As shown in FIG.

The passage width of each of the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b exceeds the diameter of the game ball and is less than twice the diameter of the game ball (for example, about 1.4 times the diameter of the game ball). ing. In addition, the outlets of the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b are formed in symmetrical positions with respect to the shaft portion 713 of the route sorting device 703. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, the first entering ball count switch 437a and the second entering ball count switch 437b of the present embodiment are set near each exit of the corresponding first introduction passage 718a and second introduction passage 718b (in this example, game balls are at the exit). at the same distance from each exit (for example, 1 cm behind each exit).

Then, when the central winning unit 37 is in the open state, the game ball entering the specific area 401 through the first ball entry opening 403a or the second ball entry opening 403b is transferred to the first introduction passage 718a or It passes through the second introduction passage 718b and falls onto the guide surfaces 714a and 715a of the first wing portion 714 or the second wing portion 715. As shown in FIG. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 41(b) and 41(c), when the game ball falls only on either the first wing portion 714 or the second wing portion 715, the route sorting device 703 It rotates (tilts) by the force received from the game ball. Furthermore, by rotating the route sorting device 703, the guide surfaces 714a and 715a of the first wing portion 714 or the second wing portion 715 communicate with the normal guide portion 704 (the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion The communication path to the normal guide part 704 blocked by 715 is opened), and the game ball is guided to the normal guide part 704 (enters).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 41(a), when the game balls (the same number each, for example, one each) fall to the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715 almost at the same time, , the rotation of the route sorting device 703 is suppressed. By avoiding the rotation of the route sorting device 703 , both the game balls falling on the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715 are guided to the special guide portion 705 .

The normal guide portion 704, the normal passage 701, and the game ball rolling path 433 constitute the first guide route (normal route), and the special guide portion 705, the special passage 702, and the game ball rolling path 433 ( A portion downstream of the midstream portion) constitutes a second guidance route (special route). A route sorting device 703 is provided at a branch point between the normal route (normal passage 701) and the special route (special passage 702).

Further, as shown in FIG. 39, the rotating body unit 410 is provided with a slide unit 721 which is installed corresponding to the most upstream part of the game ball rolling path 433 and configured to be slidable in the horizontal direction. . The slide unit 721 includes a passage-side guide plate 723 that slopes downward to the left, and an out-side guide plate 724 that is connected to the right side of the pass-side guide plate 723 and slopes downward to the right. A member 722 and a slide motor 725 for reciprocating the slide member 722 to the left and right are provided. The slide motor 725 is composed of a stepping motor and is driven and controlled by pulse signals output from the main controller 261 .

Furthermore, the exit of the normal passage 701 is formed at the upper position of the slide unit 721 (slide member 722), the game ball that has passed through the normal passage 701, the passage side guide plate 723 of the slide member 722, or the out side It will drop onto the guide plate 724 . In addition, the width of the out-side guide plate 724 is wider than the width of the passage-side guide plate 723 in the left-right direction. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the boundary portion (the top portion of the slide member 722) between the passage-side guide plate 723 and the out-side guide plate 724 is positioned to the right of the widthwise center position of the outlet of the normal passage 701. The slide speed is set to be faster than the slide speed when positioned on the left side. With this configuration, in the reciprocating motion of the slide member 722, the time during which the top portion of the slide member 722 is positioned on the left side of the center position of the outlet of the normal passage 701 in the width direction is longer than the time during which it is positioned on the right side. is configured to be As a result, for example, game balls passing through the normal path 701 are distributed more to the right at a ratio of 1:5 by the slide unit 721 .

39 and 40, on the upper wall portion 432 (game ball rolling path 433) of the unit cover 412 of the rotor unit 410, at the right side of the surrounding wall 434 (rotator 414), A dropout opening 727 communicating with the out passage 428 is formed. In other words, the game ball guided to the right side of the game ball rolling road 433 by the slide unit 721 drops into the out passage 428 through the drop opening 727 and is discharged outside the game area. there is In addition, the dropout opening 727 communicates with a portion of the out passage 428 upstream of the installation position of the non-special entering ball detection switch 462, and the game dropped into the out passage 428 via the dropout opening 727 A ball is also detected by the non-special ball entry detection switch 462 .

On the other hand, the game ball guided to the left side of the game ball rolling road 433 by the slide unit 721 is displaced counterclockwise on the game ball rolling road 433 toward the near side, and moves left and right in front of the gate portion 435 several times. , etc., and then enter into the pocket portions 416a and 416b when the relative positions of the rotating body 414 and the special pocket portion 416a or the non-special pocket portion 416b match via the gate portion 435. It will happen.

Further, as shown in FIG. 39, the pair of left and right special passages 702 have outlets formed at left and right lateral positions of the rotating body unit 410 (upper wall portion 432 of the unit cover 412). The passing game ball enters the midstream portion of the game ball rolling path 433 . Even when the game ball passes through the special passage 702 on the right side, the game ball passes through the special passage 702 because it is guided to a portion downstream of the falling opening 727 in the game ball rolling path 433. A game ball always enters the special pocket portion 416a or the non-special pocket portion 416b of the rotating body 414 through the gate portion 435. FIG. That is, if the game ball can enter the special guide portion 705 and pass through the special passage 702, it is possible to avoid (skip) sorting by the slide unit 721, and as a result, the game ball enters the special pocket portion 416a. It is possible to increase the possibility of entering the ball and, by extension, the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the big win state.

In this embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the rotating body 414 and the slide member 722 are configured to continue to operate at a constant cycle or constant rhythm. For example, when a game ball is detected by the entering ball count switch 437, the operation is started, and when all game balls are discharged from the specific area 401 (a specified time has elapsed since all game balls have been discharged) may be configured so that the operation stops if

Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball detected by the special ball detection switch 461 by entering the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 and passing through the safe passage 427 is guided to the type lottery area 408. is configured as The type lottery area 408 includes a 15R ball entrance 731 that gives a "15 rounds" jackpot state (15 rounds jackpot) when a game ball enters, and "7 rounds" when a game ball enters. A 7R ball entrance 732 where a jackpot state (7 round jackpot) is awarded, and a 3R ball entrance 733 where a "3 round" jackpot state (3 round jackpot) is awarded when a gaming ball enters. is provided. Furthermore, a 15R ball entry detection switch 734 that detects a game ball that has entered the 15R ball entry hole 731, a 7R ball entry detection switch 735 that detects a game ball that has entered the 7R ball entry hole 732, and a 3R ball entry hole. A 3R entry detection switch 736 for detecting a game ball that has entered 733 is provided.

In addition, in the type lottery area 408, a game ball that has entered the type lottery area 408 is classified as a type distribution means for distributing it to either the 15R ball entrance 731, the 7R ball entrance 732, or the 3R ball entrance 733. A sorting device 741 is provided. The type sorting device 741 includes a start stand 742 to which game balls entering the type lottery area 408 are first guided, and a 3R A guide passage 743 or a first bridge board 744 to be allocated to either "other", and a game ball allocated to "other" by the first bridge board 744 is guided, and the game ball is entered into 7R. It has a second bridge plate 747 that distributes to either the 7R guide passage 745 leading to the mouth 732 or the 15R guide passage 746 leading to the 15R inlet 731 .

More specifically, a start table 742 whose top surface slopes downward to the right is installed in the upper left part of the type lottery area 408, and a first bridge board 744 is installed to the right of and slightly below the start table 742. A second bridge plate 747 is installed to the right of and slightly below the first bridge plate 744, and a 15R guide passage 746 and a 15R entrance 731 are installed to the right of and slightly below the second bridge plate 747. ing. The first bridging plate 744 and the second bridging plate 747 are composed of a shaft portion 748 rotatably supported so that the central axis extends in the front-rear direction, and a substantially plate-like support projecting rightward from the shaft portion 748 . 749. Furthermore, a first cam 750 and a second cam 751 are provided below the first bridge plate 744 and the second bridge plate 747 to contact (support) the lower surfaces of the first bridge plate 744 and the second bridge plate 747, respectively. A motor (not shown) rotates the first cam 750 and the second cam 751 to rotate (tilt) the first bridge plate 744 and the second bridge plate 747 .

The first bridge plate 744 of the present embodiment has a forward position in which the upper surface of the receiving portion 749 is inclined slightly downward to the right and communicates with the upper surface side of the second bridge plate 747. The upper surface of the receiving portion 749 is greatly inclined downward, and is configured to be displaceable between a drop position communicating with the 3R guide passage 743 . Further, the second bridge plate 747 has a forward position where the upper surface of the receiving portion 749 is inclined slightly downward to the right and communicates with the 15R guide passage 746, and the upper surface of the receiving portion 749 is higher than in the forward position. It is configured to be displaceable between a falling position communicating with the 7R guide passage 745 with a large downward inclination.

The first cam 750 and the second cam 751 have the same shape and size, and rotate counterclockwise in FIG. 39, for example. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the rotation periods of the first cam 750 and the second cam 751 are not synchronized, and for example, the first cam 750 rotates slightly faster than the second cam 751 . In addition, the game ball guided to the 3R guide passage 743 is confirmed to enter the 3R ball entrance 733, and the game ball guided to the 7R guide passage 745 is confirmed to enter the 7R ball entrance 732. Then, the game ball guided to the 15R guide passage 746 is configured to enter the 15R ball entrance 731 .

Then, when the game ball guided to the first bridge plate 744 via the start platform 742 moves to the right side of the first bridge plate 744, the first bridge plate 744 is at (the range of) the advance position. If there is, the game ball is guided to the second bridge board 747 . Furthermore, when the game ball guided to the second bridge plate 747 moves to the right side of the second bridge plate 747, if the second bridge plate 747 is (in the range of) the advance position, the game ball is 15R. Guided by guide passage 746 .

On the other hand, when the game ball guided by the second bridge plate 747 moves to the right side of the second bridge plate 747, if the second bridge plate 747 falls (in the range), the game ball is 7R. Guided by guide passage 745 . Further, when the game ball guided by the first bridge plate 744 moves to the right side of the first bridge plate 744, if the first bridge plate 744 falls (in the range), the game ball is 3R. It is guided to the guide passage 743 . In this embodiment, after the special ball entry detection switch 461 is detected, any one of the 15R ball entry detection switch 734, the 7R ball entry detection switch 735, and the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 is detected. In that case, the jackpot state of the corresponding type is started.

In addition, the first bridge plate 744 and the second bridge plate 747 are configured such that the front-rear width is wider than the left-right width (the width in the centrifugal direction). Furthermore, the start table 742, the first bridge plate 744, and the second bridge plate 747 are configured to not only tilt downward to the right as described above, but also tilt slightly downward forward. In other words, the game ball entering the type lottery area 408 through the safe passage 427 is guided to the start table 742 from the back side of the start table 742, the start table 742, the first bridge board 744, and the second bridge board 747. is configured to move to the right front side. In addition, the entrance portions of the 3R guide passage 743, the 7R guide passage 745, and the 15R guide passage 746 cover the range where the game ball is guided by the first bridge plate 744 and the second bridge plate 747, In addition, it has a shape (substantially funnel-like shape) in which the received game balls are concentrated in a passage with a width that allows the game balls to pass one by one. In addition, the first cam 750 and the second cam 751 are arranged corresponding to the rear side portions of the lower surface of the first bridge plate 744 and the second bridge plate 747 (receiving portion 749), and the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage. It is configured so as not to interfere with 745.

In this embodiment, the 3R guide path 743 is longer than the 7R guide path 745, and the 7R guide path 745 is longer than the 15R guide path 746. Furthermore, due to the difference in the distance of each guide path 743, 745, 746, the average time required until the gaming ball entered the type lottery area 408 is detected by the 3R entering ball detection switch 736 (3R arrival time) Than, the average time required for the game ball that entered the type lottery area 408 to be detected by the 7R ball detection switch 735 (7R arrival time) is shorter, and the type lottery than the 7R arrival time The average time (15R reaching time) required for the game ball that has entered the area 408 to be detected by the 15R entering ball detecting switch 734 is shorter. For example, the 3R arrival time is set to "9 seconds to 10 seconds", the 7R arrival time is set to "6 seconds to 7 seconds", and the 15R arrival time is set to "3 seconds to 4 seconds".

In addition, the rotating body 414 takes "9 seconds" to make one revolution. However, the speed of the rotor 414 is not constant. That is, of the two special pocket portions 416a provided side by side in the rotation direction of the rotating body 414, the upstream special pocket portion 416a reaching the gate portion 435 first matches the entrance of the safe passage 427 (front position). ) until the special pocket portion 416a on the downstream side that reaches the gate portion 435 later aligns with the entrance of the safe passage 427 (until it is placed in the front position) is "1.5 seconds". , and rotates faster than other states. By changing the distance between the special pocket portions 416a in the rotational direction of the rotor 414, the rotational speed of the rotor 414 is adjusted (for example, the rotational speed of the rotor 414 is kept constant). is possible.

Then, at the timing when the two special pocket portions 416a (without sandwiching the non-special pocket portion 416b) successively coincide with the gate portion 435 provided in front of the rotating body 414, a plurality of game balls are placed in the gate portion 435. In the peripheral part, when it is in a state of waiting (suspended) for entering the pocket part 416, the game ball enters the two special pocket parts 416a continuously, and in turn, the type lottery area 408 Two game balls will enter in succession. In this case, the time lag from when the game ball enters the type lottery area 408 until the next game ball enters the type lottery area 408 is the shortest, and the time is "1.5 seconds".

With this configuration, for example, when two game balls continuously enter the type lottery area 408, the preceding game ball is guided to the 3R guide passage 743, and the subsequent game ball is guided to the 7R guide passage 745, Or, when the situation is guided to the 15R guide passage 746, prior to the preceding game ball entering the 3R ball entrance 733 (detected by the 3R entering ball detection switch 736), the subsequent game A ball enters the 7R ball entrance 732 or the 15R ball entrance 731 (detected by the 7R ball entrance detection switch 735 or the 15R ball entrance detection switch 734). Also, for example, when two game balls enter the type lottery area 408 in succession, the preceding game ball is guided to the 7R guide passage 745, and the subsequent game ball is guided to the 15R guide passage 746. When the situation is such that the preceding game ball enters the 7R ball entrance 732 (detected by the 7R ball entrance detection switch 735), the subsequent game ball enters the 15R ball entrance 731. It is designed to hit the ball (detected by the 15R incoming ball detection switch 734).

Of the two special pocket portions 416a provided side by side in the rotation direction of the rotating body 414, after the special pocket portion 416a on the downstream side coincides with the entrance of the safe passage 427 (after it is placed in the front position), the upstream The time required for the side special pocket portion 416a to align with the entrance of the safe passage 427 (until it is placed in the front position) is "7.5 seconds". Therefore, even if the game ball entered into the special pocket portion 416a on the upstream side enters the type lottery region 408 after the game ball entered into the special pocket portion 416a on the downstream side enters the type lottery region 408, There is a time lag of "7.5 seconds", even if the game ball that entered the type lottery area 408 earlier was guided to the 3R guide passage 743, and the game ball that entered later was guided to the 15R entrance 731. Even so, before the previous game ball is detected by the 3R ball detection switch 736, the subsequent game ball will not be detected by the 15R ball ball detection switch 734 (that is, the type lottery area 408 Since the difference between the preceding game ball and the subsequent game ball is 7.5 seconds, even if the preceding game ball is guided to the 3R guide passage 743 and the subsequent game ball is guided to the 15R guide passage 746 , The preceding game ball is detected by the 3R entry detection switch 736 with 1.5 to 2.5 seconds remaining, and the subsequent game ball is detected by the 15R entry detection switch 734 for 3 to 4 seconds. Therefore, detection of subsequent game balls cannot overtake detection of preceding game balls).

In this embodiment, the "15 round jackpot" corresponds to the second special game state (second privilege, second advantageous state, second award) for the "7 round jackpot" and "7 round jackpot", The "7-round jackpot" corresponds to the first special game state (first privilege, first advantage state, first grant) for the "15-round jackpot", and the second special game state for the "3-round jackpot". (2nd privilege, 2nd advantageous state, 2nd grant), and "3 round jackpot" is the first special game state (1st privilege, 1st advantage, first grant). Also, the 15R ball entrance 731 is configured as the second type ball entrance means for the 7R ball entrance 732 and the 3R ball entrance 733, and the 7R ball entrance 732 is the first type ball entrance means for the 15R ball entrance 731. and is configured as a second type ball entry means for the 3R ball entrance 733, and the 3R ball entrance 733 is configured as a first type ball entrance means for the 15R ball entrance 731 and the 7R ball entrance 732. be. Furthermore, the 15R ball entry detection switch 734 is configured as a second type ball entry detection means for the 7R ball entry detection switch 735 and the 3R ball entry detection switch 736. It is configured as a first type entering ball detection means and is configured as a second type entering ball detection means for the 3R entering ball detection switch 736, and the 3R entering ball detection switch 736 detects the 15R entering ball detection switch 734 and the 7R entering ball detection. The switch 735 is configured as a first type ball detection means.

In addition, the 15R arrival time corresponds to the second type determination time for the 7R arrival time and the 3R arrival time, the 7R arrival time corresponds to the first type determination time for the 15R arrival time, and the second type determination time for the 3R arrival time It corresponds to the type determination time, and the 3R arrival time corresponds to the first type determination time for the 15R arrival time and the 7R arrival time. In addition, the 15R guide path 746 is configured as a second guide path (second ball entry route) for the 7R guide path 745 and the 3R guide path 743, and the 7R guide path 745 is the first guide path for the 15R guide path 746 ( The 3R guide path 743 is configured as a first ball entrance route) and is configured as a second guide path (second ball entrance route) for the 3R guide path 743, and the 3R guide path 743 is configured for the 15R guide path 746 and the 7R guide path 745 1 entry route).

In addition, in the type lottery area 408, provided near the entrance of the 3R guide passage 743, 3R early detection switch 753 for detecting the game ball moving in the 3R guide passage 743, provided near the entrance of the 7R guide passage 745, A 7R early detection switch 754 for detecting a game ball moving in the 7R guide passage 745 is provided. In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, the central winning unit 37 is provided with a translucent covering cover 756 (the part marked with dots in FIG. 4) that covers the front of the 3R guide path 743 and the 7R guide path 745. The visibility of the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745 is slightly reduced.

Furthermore, a translucent 3R seal 757a marked with "3R" is attached to the covering cover 756 at the portion covering the entrance of the 3R guide passage 743, and "7R" is attached at the portion covering the entrance of the 7R guide passage 745. A translucent 7R seal 757b marked with "15R" is stuck, and a translucent 15R seal 757c marked with "15R" is stuck to a portion covering the 15R entrance 731. As shown in FIG. Although details will be described later, when a game ball is detected by the 3R early detection switch 753, the 7R early detection switch 754, and the 15R incoming ball detection switch 734, the corresponding effect sound is derived. Basically, if a game ball enters the 3R seal 757a, 7R seal 757b, or 15R seal 757c, which are regarded as winning openings (if the game ball enters the back side), the jackpot state of the corresponding type can be recognized as given. In this embodiment, the 3R early detection switch 753 and the 7R early detection switch 754 constitute early detection means. Also, the 3R seal 757a, the 7R seal 757b, and the 15R seal 757c constitute the entrance display section.

As shown in FIG. 4, the first start-up winning device 33a is provided on the lower left and lower right sides of the central winning unit 37 when the pachinko machine 10 is viewed from the front. Also, the second starting prize winning device 33 b is provided directly below the central prize winning unit 37 . Further, the second starting prize winning device 33b is provided with a pair of opening and closing members 33c provided on both sides. In this embodiment, a protrusion is provided directly above the second start-up winning device 33b, and when the opening and closing member 33c is closed, it is virtually impossible to let the game ball enter the second start-up winning device 33b. It has become.

Although details will be described later, the first start-up winning device 33a and the second start-up winning device 33b are a first start-up winning switch 224a and a second start-up winning switch 224a as start-up ball detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered. A switch 224b is provided. Then, when the game ball is detected by the start winning switch 224a, 224b, the blade member 404 is opened to open the specific area 401 "small win" or the variable winning device 32 is opened. A lottery is performed to determine whether or not the player wins the "jackpot" that causes the state. Furthermore, when a lottery is held based on the detection by the first start prize switch 224a and the second start prize switch 224b, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for teaching the result of the win or fail lottery. It is configured to be done. In addition, the "win" in the lottery includes "small win" and "big win". A lottery is made as to whether the player is "lost" in which neither the variable prize winning device 32 nor the variable prize winning device 32 is opened.

Incidentally, in this embodiment, a common lottery is performed when detection is performed by the first start-up prize switch 224a and when detection is performed by the second start-up prize switch 224b. A first special display device, which is configured to perform variable display in the device 43, performs variable display for teaching the result of the winning lottery performed based on the detection by the first start winning switch 224a; It is also possible to provide a second special display device that performs a variable display for teaching the result of the win/fail lottery based on the detection by the second start winning switch 224b. Furthermore, when adopting such a configuration, each variable display is stored separately, and the corresponding variable display is digested in the order in which it was stored, or one is prioritized over the other. It may be configured as In addition, when adopting such a configuration, the distribution ratio of the type of the big win state to be given when winning the winning lottery may be made different or may be made the same.

The through gates 34 are arranged on both left and right sides of the central winning unit 37, and are configured so that game balls moving in the game area can pass through one by one. Also, the through gate 34 is provided with a through gate switch 225 for detecting game balls passing through the through gate 34 . When a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball-entering assist lottery is performed to determine whether or not the second starting prize winning device 33b (opening/closing member 33c) is to be opened. Then, when winning the ball-entering assist lottery, the second starting prize-winning device 33b (opening/closing member 33c) is opened for a specified time.

A special display device 43 and a normal symbol display device 41 are provided in the upper right portion of the game board 30 . The special display device 43 of this embodiment is composed of eight lamps, and the normal design display device 41 is composed of two lamps. In addition, the configuration of the special display device 43 and the normal symbol display device 41 is not particularly limited. It may be configured by a display device such as a device.

In addition, regarding the special display device 43, when a game ball enters the first and second start winning devices 33a and 33b, a switching display (variable display) for teaching the lottery result of the win/fail lottery is started and continues for a predetermined time. After that, when the variable display is stopped, a mode corresponding to the result of the lottery is displayed. Furthermore, the display contents of the special display device 43 are directly controlled by the main control device 261, which will be described later, so that the result of the winning lottery is definitively displayed.

In addition, when a "jackpot" is won in the winning lottery, the variable winning device 32 is opened for 30 seconds, or the variable winning device 32 receives 8 game balls as one round, which is 15 times. A jackpot (hereinafter referred to as a “direct hit jackpot”) that is repeated multiple times is provided. In addition, in the present embodiment, not only when winning the "jackpot" in the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first and second start-up winning devices 33a, 33b, as described above, the special pocket of the specific area 401 A jackpot state also occurs when a game ball enters the portion 416a (a game ball is detected by the special ball entry detection switch 461).

In addition, with regard to the normal symbol display device 41, when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, switching display (variation display) for displaying the lottery result of the entry assist lottery is started, and after a predetermined time, the variation display. When stopping, a mode corresponding to the result of the entry assist lottery is displayed. In addition, the normal symbol display device 41 is designed such that the display contents are directly controlled by the main control device 261, which will be described later, and the result of the ball-entering assist lottery is definitively displayed.

In addition, when a game ball newly passes through the through gate 34 during the variable display of the normal symbol display device 41, the variable display for that amount is performed after the variable display being performed at that time is finished. It has become. That is, the variable display is put on standby (suspended). The maximum number of times the variable display is suspended is determined for each pachinko machine model. The variable holding lamp 44 is lit to display. The normal variable suspension lamp 44 of the present embodiment is composed of two lamps, and the number of suspensions is taught by appropriately switching the lighting, extinguishing, and blinking states of each lamp.

In addition, above the central winning unit 37, which is composed of a liquid crystal display device, a decorative pattern in which a number pattern is added to a predetermined pattern is additionally displayed as a presentation in accordance with the variable display of the special display device 43. A decorative pattern display device 42 is provided for variably displaying. The display contents of the decorative pattern display device 42 are controlled by a sub-control device 262 and a display control device 45, which will be described later. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 42, auxiliary display contents are determined by the sub-control device 262 based on the command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the result displayed on the special display device 43, Display is performed by a display control device 45, which will be described later.

Furthermore, when a game ball newly enters the starting winning device 33a, 33b during the variable display of the special display device 43, the variable display for that amount is performed after the variable display being performed at that time ends. It is configured to be That is, the variable display of the special display device 43 is put on standby (suspended). The maximum number of times of the suspended variable display is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in this embodiment, the variation is up to a total of four times in response to the game ball entered by the starting prize winning devices 33a and 33b. display is withheld.

In addition, the number of suspensions of the variable display of the special display device 43 is lit up by a special variation suspension lamp 46 provided on the side of the special display device 43 . The special variable suspension lamp 46 is composed of two lamps, and the number of suspensions is taught by appropriately switching the state of lighting, extinguishing, and blinking of each lamp. In addition, even when a game ball newly wins the starting prize winning device 33 during the big win state or the small win (during the opening of the blade member 404), the variable display for that amount is also suspended, and the variable display is the big win. Executed after the end of the state or small hit state. Incidentally, the decoration symbol display device 42 may also display a suspension icon for teaching the number of suspension times of the variable display of the special display device 43 .

The variable winning device 32 (large winning opening) is arranged in the lower center of the game area (game board 30). In addition, the variable winning device 32 is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot win, and is in an open state in which game balls can win in the event of a big win.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a rail 50 which is composed of an inner rail forming part 51 and an outer rail forming part 52 and guides the game ball shot from the shooting device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30 . As a result, the game ball shot with the rotating operation of the handle 18 is guided into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 through the shooting rails 61 and 50 .

A return ball preventing member 53 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion in FIG. 4) of the inner rail constituting portion 51 . As a result, the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area is prevented from returning into the rail 50 again. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to substantially the tip portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail constituting portion 52 . A game ball shot with a force greater than or equal to a predetermined amount hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion side of the game board 30 .

Further, in the present embodiment, the outer rail forming part 52 ends at the upper right part of the game board 30 and the inner rail forming part 51 ends at the lower right part of the game board 30 . Therefore, the play area is defined by the rails 50 and the inner peripheral surfaces of the window holes 39 of the resin base 38 . However, since the game ball hit by the shooting device 60 may flow backward on the rail 50 until it passes the return ball prevention member 53, the parallel parts of the inner and outer rail constituent parts 51 and 52 are excluded from the game area. be killed.

As shown in FIG. 3 , a ball passage unit 70 is provided on the rear side of the front frame set 14 below the window portion 101 . The ball passage unit 70 includes a lower tray communication path 71 that connects the payout mechanism 352 to the outlet 16 of the lower tray 15 and an upper tray communication path 73 that connects the payout mechanism 352 to the upper tray 19 . In addition, there is a gap of a predetermined distance between the launch rail 61 provided on the inner frame 12 and the rail 50 (outer rail constituting portion 52), and the ball passage unit 70 receives a game ball dropped from the gap. A foul ball passage 72 is formed leading to the plate 15 . As a result, if a game ball shot from the shooting device 60 does not reach the return-ball prevention member 53 and travels back along the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball passes through the foul ball passage 72 to the lower tray 15. Ejected.

Reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 3 and 4 denotes a payout passage for guiding game balls paid out by a payout mechanism 352, which will be described later, to the front of the inner frame 12. The upper tray communication passage 73 (upper tray 19) and a passage leading to the lower tray communication passage 71 (lower tray 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the payout passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring or the like, and nearly closes the outlet of the payout passage 67. ing. Further, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 is pushed open by the inlet-side rear end of the lower tray communication passage 71 . The inlets (ball inlets) of the lower tray communicating path 71 and the upper tray communicating path 73 are adjacent to each other, and the inlets and the dispensing path 67 are separated by a predetermined distance when the front frame set 14 is closed, A game ball can pass through the gap between the two. Therefore, when the upper tray 19 and the upper tray communication path 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls to be paid out flow to the lower tray communication path 71 side (overflow to the entrance side of the lower tray communication path 71), and the lower tray connection It will be dispensed to the lower tray 15 through the passage 71 .

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) for detecting game balls positioned in the lower tray communication passage 71 . Due to the presence of the full detection switch, it is grasped that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls (that the lower tray 15 is full of game balls and that the game balls are staying in the lower tray communication passage 71). be able to. In the present embodiment, control is performed such that launching of the launching device 60 is prohibited based on detection of game balls continuously for a predetermined period of time by the full detection switch. In addition, when the game ball is no longer retained in the lower tray communication passage 71 and the game ball is no longer detected by the full detection switch (when the game ball is no longer detected continuously for a predetermined time), the launching of the shooting device 60 is permitted.

Next, the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. On the back of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally, and some of them are arranged so as to be overlapped in the front and back, and a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls. and a resin protective cover, etc. are attached. Since the dispensing mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion is generally called the back pack, the unit is called "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the rear configuration of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, on the rear surface of the game board 30, a resin-made frame cover 213 that covers the center winning unit 37 and the like from behind is provided so as to protrude rearward. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 213, a decorative pattern display device 42, a display control device 45, and a sub-control device 262 are detachably attached to the front through the opening of the frame cover 213 as a liquid crystal display device.

The decorative pattern display device 42 is housed in a storage box 42a having an opening for exposing the display portion (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative pattern display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10, and is attached to the rear surface of the frame cover 213. fixed on the side. The display control device 45 is housed in a substrate box 45a and fixed to the back side of the decorative pattern display device 42 (housing box 42a). The sub-controller 262 is accommodated in a substrate box 262a and fixed to the rear side of the display control device 45 (substrate box 45a). The storage box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, etc. from behind. The back frame set 215 is provided with a ball recovery mechanism (not shown) for recovering game balls that have entered various winning slots. The game balls collected by this ball collecting mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 which will be described later, and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 from a discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 .

Also, in this embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main controller 261 . More specifically, a substrate box 263 in which a main controller 261 is mounted is rotatably pivoted to the back frame set 215 and can be opened rearward.

The main controller 261 is housed in a substrate box 263 made of transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and these box base and box cover are connected by a sealing member. The board box 263 connected by the sealing member is configured so that it cannot be opened unless a predetermined trace is left. As a result, it is possible to easily discover that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

In addition, on the game board 30, a ball entry detection switch (ball entry detection means) for detecting a game ball entering the various prize entry holes corresponding to various prize entry holes such as the general prize entry hole 31 as a ball entry means is provided. is provided. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4 , a winning opening switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31 , and a count switch 223 is provided to the variable winning device 32 . In addition, the first start prize winning device 33a and the second start prize winning device 33b are provided with a first start prize winning switch 224a and a second start prize winning switch 224b as starting winning ball detection means corresponding to each of them. Furthermore, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34 .

Also, although not shown, the back frame set 215 is provided with a first board relay board that is electrically connected to the winning slot switch 221, the count switch 223, and the through gate switch 225 via cable connectors. . This first board surface relay board relays the winning slot switch 221 and the like and a main controller 261 as main control means, and is electrically connected to the main controller 261 via a cable connector.

On the other hand, the start winning switches 224a and 224b for detecting the winning balls to the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, the winning ball count switch 437 provided in the central winning unit 37 (the first winning ball counting switch 437a, the second winning ball count switch 437b), special entry detection switch 461, non-special entry detection switch 462, round entry detection switch (15R entry detection switch 734, 7R entry detection switch 735, 3R entry detection switch 736), and The early detection switches 753 and 754 are directly connected to the main controller 261 via connector cables without passing through a relay board.

The detection results detected by the various entering ball detection switches are taken into the main controller 261 . Then, a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid out) according to the winning situation of each time is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and based on the output signal from the payout control device 311, a predetermined number of game balls is sent. (Except when detected by the through gate switch 225, the non-special entry detection switch 462, the round entry detection switches 734, 735, 736, and the early detection switches 753, 754.)
In addition, although not shown, on the back side of the game board 30, a solenoid for opening the large winning opening is provided by the variable winning device 32. A starting port solenoid for opening and closing is provided. The back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids and the main controller 261 .

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is formed by integrating a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352 . The back pack unit 203 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the left side (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward about an opening/closing axis extending in the vertical direction. ing. In addition, an external terminal plate 240 is provided on the upper left portion of the back pack unit 203 (upper right portion in FIG. 5).

The external terminal board 240 is for relaying transmission of various kinds of information to a game hall computer or the like, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For the sake of convenience, no reference numerals are attached, but for example, terminals for outputting information about the current game state (jackpot state, high probability state, etc.), front frame set 14 detected by open detection switches 91 and 92 described later, and inner A terminal for outputting information about the opening of the frame 12, a terminal for outputting information about various error states such as ball entry error, lower tray full error, tank no ball error, payout error, payout from payout control device 311 A terminal or the like is provided for outputting information about the number of winning balls.

The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, ABS resin, and has a protective cover portion 354 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which left and right side surfaces and an upper surface are closed and only a lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213 . However, in this embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 is configured to cover the upper portion and the right portion (the left portion in FIG. 5) of the board box 263 as well. As a result, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right side of the board box 263 and the terminal section (board side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main controller 261 are covered. It will happen.

The dispensing mechanism section 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover section 354 . Namely, above the protective cover portion 354, a tank 355 which opens upward is provided, and the tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall. Below the tank 355 is connected a tank rail 356 which has, for example, two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and is gently inclined toward the downstream side. Concatenated. A payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and payout of the required number of game balls is appropriately performed by a predetermined electrical configuration such as a payout motor. The game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper tray 19 and the like.

In the payout mechanism section 352, a payout relay board 381 for relaying a payout command signal from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed, and a power switch board 382 for taking in the main power supply from the outside is installed. there is The power switch board 382 is supplied with a main power supply of, for example, 24 V AC via a voltage converter, and is turned on or off by a switching operation of the power switch 382a.

Below the back pack unit 203 (board box 263), a lower frame set 251 that is pivotally supported by the left side (the right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and that can be opened rearward is provided. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the ball collection mechanism described above flow in. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging the pachinko machine 10 to the outside is formed. In other words, the game balls that have won the prize-winning openings such as the general prize-winning opening 31 are collected via the ball recovery mechanism of the back frame set 215 and discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 . Incidentally, the out port 36 is similarly connected to the discharge passage portion 217, and the game balls that do not win in any of the prize winning ports are also discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharge chute. In this embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It is also possible to

In addition, as shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the lower frame set 251, a payout control device 311, a firing control device 312, a power supply device 313, and a card unit connection board 314 are detachably attached in a state of being stacked back and forth. It is

The firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in a board box 313 a and fixed to the back side of the lower frame set 251 . For the sake of convenience, the launch control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices, but they are actually configured by one substrate (printed circuit board).

Also, the payout control device 311 is housed in the board box 311a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The board box 311a housing the payout control device 311 is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the board box 263 housing the above-described main control device 261 so that a trace of the opening of the board box 311a remains. It's becoming

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in a board box 314a and fixed to the rear side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313).

The board boxes 311a, 313a, and 314a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Also, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 projecting outward from the substrate box 311a. For example, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a payout error such as a ball clogging occurs in the payout motor, the payout motor is rotated forward or reverse to clear the ball jam (return to normal state).

Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erase switch 323 projecting outward from the board box 313a. This pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and even in the event of a power failure, it can retain the state at the time of the power failure, and can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure when recovering from the power failure (recovery of power). can. Therefore, when the power is turned off in a normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored. to put in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the rear side of the right side portion of the inner frame 12 . The locking device 600 is provided with a cylinder lock 610 (see FIG. 1, etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14. A key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 610 and turned to one side to open the lock. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating it in the other direction. In this embodiment, inner frame 12 is locked to outer frame 11 and front frame set 14 is locked to inner frame 12 .

As described above, the right-side frame-constituting portion 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with the extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5). reference). As a result, it becomes difficult to insert a wire or the like from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire or the like. As a result, the defense performance can be improved. Furthermore, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and in the closed state of the inner frame 12, The rear pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame open detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right portion of the front side of the inner frame 12 (the right side of the launching device 60), and FIG. As shown in , an inner frame open detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided on the lower right portion of the back side of the inner frame 12 (lower left in FIG. 5). The front frame open detection switch 91 and the inner frame open detection switch 92 each have a detection part that can appear and disappear with respect to the switch body, and the front frame open detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection part faces forward, The inner frame open detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection portion faces rearward. When the detector is in a state of protruding from the switch body, an ON signal is output to the main controller 261, and when the detector is pushed toward the switch body and retracted into the switch body, an OFF signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261 . That is, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the detection part of the front frame open detection switch 91 is pressed by the back surface of the front frame set 14 and is turned off. It turns on. Similarly, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the inner frame open detection switch 92 is turned off by pressing the pressing portion 86 integrally formed with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11. When the inner frame 12 is opened, the switch 92 is turned off. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. A CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer, which is an arithmetic device, is mounted on the main controller 261 (main board) as special game state control means and opening/closing control means. The CPU 501 includes a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 501, and a RAM 503 that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 502. Also, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. However, the CPU, ROM, and RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be integrated into chips for each function.

The RAM 503 includes a stack area that stores the contents of the internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 501, and a work area (work area) that stores various flags, counters, I/O values, and the like. ) and a backup area 503a.

The RAM 503 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 313 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off. All data stored in the

The backup area 503a is designed to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut when the power is turned off when the power is turned off due to a power cut or the like. (similarly)) and the values of each register, I/O, etc. are stored. Writing to the backup area 503a is executed by the main processing when the power is turned off, and conversely, each value written to the backup area 503a is restored when the power is turned on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation; the same applies hereinafter). is executed in The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a are backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and RAM 503 via a bus line 504 including an address bus, a data bus, and the like. Connected to the input/output port 505 are a RAM erasure switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub-control device 262, a special display device 43, a normal symbol display device 41, and the like, which will be described later. With this configuration, the special display device 43 and the normal symbol display device 41 are directly controlled by the main control device 261 . On the other hand, the decorative pattern display device 42 is controlled via the sub-control device 262 .

In addition, although illustration of various relay boards and the like is omitted for convenience, the input/output port 505 includes a winning opening switch 221, a count switch 223, start winning switches 224a and 224b, a through gate switch 225, a ball count switch 437, a special Various detection switches such as ball entry detection switch 461, non-special ball entry detection switch 462, round ball entry detection switches 734, 735, 736, early detection switches 753, 754, various substrates, blade solenoid for opening and closing blade member 404 405, a rotating body motor 415 that rotates the rotating body 414, a slide motor 725 that reciprocates the slide member 722, and tilts the first bridge plate 744 and the second bridge plate 747 (the first cam 750 and the second cam 751 are operated). Various electric parts such as a motor that rotates are connected. In other words, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board-side connectors) for connecting connectors of various cable connectors.

The sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means includes a CPU 551 which is an arithmetic device, a ROM 552 storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 551, and a control program stored in the ROM 552. It includes a RAM 553, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data, etc., an input/output port 554, a bus line 555, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit (not shown). It has The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the CPU 551 .

The input/output port 554 is connected to the CPU 551 , the ROM 552 and the RAM 553 via a bus line 555 and also to the display control device 45 . Further, the input/output port 554 is connected with the speaker SP, the performance button 125, various illumination parts, and the lamps 102 and 104. FIG.

The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to execute display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261, and causes the decorative pattern display device 42 to display. In addition, as described above, in this embodiment, the special display device 43 controlled by the main control device 261 displays whether or not it is a big hit, and the decorative pattern display device 42 controlled by the sub-control device 262 Then, a display is performed in accordance with the display of the special display device 43 .

The payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 358 . A CPU 511, which is an arithmetic device, includes a ROM 512 storing control programs executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 used as a work memory and the like.

Similar to the RAM 503 of the main controller 261, the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511 and the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511, various flags and counters, It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored, and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 313 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. data is backed up. If at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a are backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

Backup area 513a, when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power cut when the power is turned on again, the stack pointer at the time of power cut, each register, This is an area for storing values such as I/O. Writing to the backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the backup area 513a is executed by the main process when the power is turned on. As with the CPU 501 of the main controller 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SK1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as power failure processing.

In the work area, a payout permission flag set to allow the payout of prize balls by the payout control device 311, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a main control device 261 A command buffer is provided in which commands sent from are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag for setting the payout permission of prize balls, and is turned on when a specific command permitting the payout of prize balls is transmitted from the main controller 261 and the specific command is received. or when it returns to the state before power-off. In this embodiment, the specific commands are a payout initialization command that instructs the initialization process of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, a prize ball command that instructs the payout of prize balls, and a There are three payout return commands sent in the case.

The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command, and is turned on when any command is received. It is turned off when returning to the previous state, and is turned off when the received command is determined by the command determination process.

The command buffer consists of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main controller 261 . The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when a command is stored and read, the store pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

An input/output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and RAM 513 via a bus line 514 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 515 is connected to the RAM erasing switch circuit 543, the main controller 261, the firing controller 312, the dispensing device 358, and the like.

The card unit connection board 314 includes a ball rental operation unit (ball rental button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10, and a card unit (ball rental unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. and are electrically connected to each other, take in the command of the player's ball lending operation, and output it to the card unit. Note that the card unit connection board 314 may be omitted in a cash machine in which game balls are directly lent to the upper tray 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through the card unit.

The shooting control device 312 permits or prohibits shooting of game balls by the shooting device 60, and the shooting device 60 is allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, a firing permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, a sensor signal detects that the player is touching the handle 18, and a firing prohibition button 18a ( 1) is not operated, the shooting device 60 is driven, and game balls are shot with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the handle 18. FIG.

The display control device 45 follows the instruction from the sub-controller 262 and executes the variable display of the decorative design in the decorative design display device 42 . The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530, 531. and An input/output port 554 of the sub-controller 262 is connected to the input port 527 . Also, the CPU 521 , program ROM 522 , work RAM 523 and VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530 . An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531, and the output port 529 is connected to the decorative pattern display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command, and controls the VDP 526. (specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 526). Thereby, display control in the decorative pattern display device 42 is performed.

A program ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and a work RAM 523 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various programs are executed by the CPU 521. is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the decorative design display device 42. By rewriting the content of the video RAM 524, the display content of the decorative design display device 42 is changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as designs displayed on the decorative design display device 42 .

The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates the LCD driver (liquid crystal driving circuit) incorporated in the decorative pattern display device 42 . Since the VDP 526 is made into an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance should be called a microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the timing of each of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc., and intervenes in the reading and writing of data.

In addition, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM deletion switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM deletion switch 323. and

The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operating power to each of the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24V power supply supplied from the outside, and generates +12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, +5V power supply for logic, backup power supply for RAM backup, etc. These +12V power supply, +5V power supply and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. An operating power source (+12V power source, +5V power source, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311 . Similarly, various switches, motors, and the like are supplied with operating power through the control device to which they are connected.

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout controller 311 when the power is shut off due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. A power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. By the output of this power failure signal SK1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of power failure and execute power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing).

Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 541 normally outputs 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the power failure processing. configured to maintain value. Therefore, the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 according to the state of the switch 323 . When the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erasing switch circuit 543 outputs a RAM erasing signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed (including power-on due to power failure cancellation), the data in the RAMs 503 and 513 of the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 are cleared. be.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

In this embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as main control means performs a lottery using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, based on the detection of the first and second start-up winning switches 224a and 224b, a jackpot that opens the variable winning device 32 and a specific area 401 (wing member 404) are opened. Winning random number counter C1 used for win/fail lottery to determine whether or not to generate a small win, and variation as variation time random number generation means used to determine the time (variation time) of variation display performed on the special display device 43. Based on the detection of the time selection counter C2, the initial value random number counter CINI used to set the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, and the through gate switch 225, whether or not the opening/closing member 33c of the starting prize winning device 33b is opened. The normal symbol random number counter C3 used for the ball entry assist lottery is used.

Each of the counters C1, C2, CINI, and C3 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 as the lower limit after reaching the upper limit. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (except for the random number initial value counter CINI).

The RAM 503 is provided with a special fluctuation holding area as a holding storage area in which each value of the winning random number counter C1 and the fluctuation time selection counter C2 is stored, and a normal fluctuation holding area in which the value of the normal symbol random number counter C3 is stored. It is Both the special variable reservation area and the normal variable reservation area have one execution area and four reservation areas (first reservation to fourth reservation area).

In addition, in each reservation area of the special variable reservation area, the values of the winning random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 are set according to the winning history of the game ball to the first and second start winning devices 33a and 33b Stored sequentially. By adopting this configuration, it is possible to suspend the variable display on the special display device 43 up to four times in total as described above. Further, in each reservation area of the normal variation reservation area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C3 is stored in time series according to the passage history of the game ball to the through gate 34.例文帳に追加By adopting this configuration, it is possible to suspend the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 up to four times as described above.

To explain each counter in detail, the winning random number counter C1 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 399, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 399) as the closing price, 0, which is the lower limit value as the opening price. It is configured to return to Normally, when the winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter (value = 0 to 399) similar to the winning random number counter C1, and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of normal processing. On the other hand, the winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the winning random number counter C1 is stored in the winning random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first or second starting prize winning device 33a, 33b (detected by the first and second starting prize winning switches 224a, 224b), the winning random number stored in the winning random number counter buffer The value of counter C1 is stored in the special change reservation area.

In the present embodiment, in the lottery performed based on the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the special change holding area, one of "small win", "big win", and "loss" is won. The number of random number values that become a "jackpot" is one, and the value is "0". That is, the "jackpot" is won with a probability of 1/400, the mode (combination of lamps that light up) corresponding to the "jackpot" is stopped and displayed on the special display device 43, and a 15-round jackpot state occurs. Become.

Furthermore, the number of random number values that become a “small win” is 398, and the value is “2 to 399”. In particular, the "small win" of the present embodiment includes a "short small win" in which the specific area 401 (blade member 404) is opened for 0.5 seconds, and a "long small win" in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. Hit" exists. Therefore, among the values of the winning random number counter C1, "2 to 21" correspond to the "long small win", and "22 to 399" correspond to the "short small win". In addition, when the "short-time small win" is won, the special display device 43 stops displaying the mode (combination of lamps that light up) corresponding to the "short-time small win", and when the "long small win" is won, the special display device. At 43, the mode corresponding to the "long small win" (combination of lighting lamps) is stopped and displayed, and the blade member 404 is opened for a specified time.

Incidentally, among the values of the winning random number counter C1, "1" is a value corresponding to "loss". combination) is stopped. In this embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with a success/fail determination table that is referred to when determining whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 corresponds to a "small win" or "big win".

In the present embodiment, after the end of the jackpot state, while the special display device 43 performs the variable display four times, the game state is such that the variable display time (variation time) on the special display device 43 is shortened. Hereinafter, the game state in which the variable time of the special display device 43 is shortened will be referred to as "time shortening mode", and the game state in which the normal length of variable display will be performed will be referred to as "normal mode". In addition, in the time reduction mode, if the variable display of the reserved special display device 43 continuously wins a small hit (the blade member 404 is closed once, the variable display is performed, and then the flow of opening is the same, but the fluctuation time is short), the blade members 404 are opened almost continuously (in rapid succession). Therefore, it is easy to collectively enter a plurality of game balls into the specific area 401 of the central winning unit 37 .

Furthermore, in the time reduction mode, the opening and closing member 33c of the second starting prize winning device 33b becomes a "high ball entry state" in which the opening and closing member 33c is opened relatively frequently, and a "low ball entry state" in which the opening and closing member 33c is hardly opened. Compared to the mode, it is easier to enter the game ball into the second starting prize winning device 33b. Specifically, in the normal mode, the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 for displaying the result of the ball entry assist lottery performed based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 34 is 10 seconds, and the ball entry is performed. The opening time of the opening/closing member 33c when winning the assist lottery is 0.4 seconds. On the other hand, in the time reduction mode, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol display device 41 is 0.5 seconds, and the opening time of the opening/closing member 33c in the case of winning the entrance assist lottery is 2 seconds.

The variable time selection counter C2 is configured such that it is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to 0, which is the lower limit, after reaching the upper limit (that is, 9). The variable time selection counter C2 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the variable time selection counter C2 is stored in the variable time selection counter buffer. Then, the value of the variable time selection counter C2 stored in the variable time selection counter buffer is stored in the special variable holding area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the first and second start winning devices 33a and 33b. .

In the present embodiment, in the normal mode, the variation time of the special display device 43 is 2 seconds or 3 seconds when a "small win" is made in the winning lottery. It should be noted that the ROM 502 has first and second variation time selection tables that are referenced when determining whether the value of the variation time selection counter C2 corresponds to "2-second variation" or "3-second variation". is provided. In addition, in the normal mode, the variation time of the special display device 43 is "7 seconds" in the case of "big hit" or "loss" in the lottery. Furthermore, in the time reduction mode, the fluctuation time of the special display device 43 is uniformly "0.1 second" regardless of the result of the lottery.

Note that the size and range of each counter is merely an example and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the magnitudes of the winning random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 are different prime numbers and that they are not synchronized in any case.

In addition, the normal symbol random number counter C3 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 9, for example, and returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 9). The random number counter C3 is periodically updated (once per timer interrupt in this embodiment), and when the game ball passes through either the left or right through gate 34, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C3 is acquired. There are eight random number values to be won, and the range is "1 to 8".When the value of the normal symbol random number counter C3 is acquired, the variable display is normally displayed on the symbol display device 41 for a predetermined time. After that, the symbols corresponding to winning or losing ("0" or "-" in this example) are stopped and displayed, and the second starting prize winning device 33b (opening/closing member 33c) is opened for a predetermined time. .

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to flowcharts. The processing of the CPU 501 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment), and a stop signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing and the NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, and then the main processing will be explained.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 every 2 msec, for example.

In FIG. 11, first, in step S301, various prize winning switches are read. That is, it reads the states of various switches (except for the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main controller 261, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information). In addition, when the game ball is paid out in response to the detection of the switch, the value of the corresponding prize ball counter is added, and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the detection signal has not been input, the process ends. In addition, in the external output processing of the normal processing to be described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311 . Also, when this prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step S302, random number initial value update processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this example).

Also, in step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1, the variable time selection counter C2, and the normal symbol random number counter C3 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (399, 9, 9, respectively in this embodiment). Clear to 0 when reaching Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1, C2 and C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503. FIG.

After that, in step S304, the starting prize winning process accompanying the winning to the first and second starting prize winning devices 33a, 33b is executed, and in step S305, the through gate passing process accompanying the game ball passing through the through gate 34 is executed. do. Furthermore, in step S306, a ball entry count process is executed as a ball enters the specific area 401 of the central winning unit 37, and in step S307, detection by the special ball detection switch 461 (safe A special winning process associated with a ball entering the passage 427) is executed, and in step S308, a non-special winning process accompanying detection by the non-special entering ball detection switch 462 (a ball entering the out passage 428 via the non-special pocket portion 416b) is performed. Execute the special winning process.

In the subsequent step S309, an early detection process accompanying detection by the 3R early detection switch 753 and the 7R early detection switch 754 is executed. 731, 7R entrance 732, 3R entrance 733) is executed. After step S310, the timer interrupt processing is temporarily terminated.

Here, the starting winning process of step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, in the execution area and each reservation area of the special variation reservation area, the winning random number storage area that stores the value of the winning random number counter C1, the variation time random number storage area that stores the value of the variation time selection counter C2, and the suspended variation A first start winning flag is provided for determining whether or not the display is based on the ball entering the first start winning device 33a. In addition, in this embodiment, in the special variable reservation area (apart from the area that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2), A jackpot occurrence flag that indicates that you have won a "jackpot", an out flag that indicates that you have "missed", a long small hit occurrence flag that indicates that you have won a "long small win", and a "short small win" that you have won A short small hit occurrence flag is provided to indicate. In addition, a 2-second variation flag, a 3-second variation flag, and a 7-second variation flag are provided to indicate the variation time on the special display device 43 .

First, in step S501, the value of the suspension counter Na that counts the number of suspensions of variable display triggered by the entry of game balls into the first and second start winning devices 33a and 33b is the upper limit value (in this embodiment, " 4”) Determine whether it is less than If a negative determination is made in step S501, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S501 is affirmative, in step S502, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first start prize winning device 33a based on the detection information of the first start prize winning switch 224a. If the determination in step S502 is negative, the process proceeds to step S509, which will be described later. On the other hand, if the determination in step S502 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S503, and the suspension counter Na is incremented by one.

In the following step S504, the values of the winning random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 updated in the random number update process of step S303 are stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas of the special variable reservation area. In step S505, the first start winning flag in the reservation area storing the values of the winning random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2 is turned on.

In the following step S506, a winning random number counter C1 value newly stored in the special change reservation area is a value corresponding to a "small win" or "big win". In addition, the details of the success/failure determination process will be described later.

In the subsequent step S507, a variable time determination process for determining the variable time in the special display device 43 is performed based on the value of the variable time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special variable reservation area. Details of the fluctuation time determination process will be described later.

After that, in step S508, setting processing of the preceding command is performed. It should be noted that, in the starting command, the reserved and stored variation information (predetermined information used for determining the contents of the variation display) is used to determine which of the first start prize winning device 33a or the second start prize winning device 33b. Information indicating whether the variation information (first variation display or second variation display) based on, information indicating "small hit" or "big hit", information indicating the fluctuation time are included, and the next external output process (step S201 ) to the sub-controller 262 .

Here, the details of the success/failure determination process in step S506 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, in this embodiment, it is configured to determine also the types of small hits (long small hits, short small hits) in the propriety determination process.

First, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change reservation area matches "0" corresponding to the "big win". If the determination in step S5101 is affirmative, that is, if it is determined that a big win state will occur, the big win occurrence flag is turned on in step S5102, and then this processing ends.

Also, if the determination in step S5101 is negative, in step S5103 it is determined whether the value of the winning random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change holding area matches "1" corresponding to "out". determine whether or not If the determination in step S5103 is affirmative, that is, if it is determined to be "out", the out flag is turned on in step S5104, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, if it is determined to be a "small hit", then in step S5105 the value of the winning random number counter C1 newly stored in the special change holding area is set to "long small". It is determined whether or not it matches any of the values "2 to 21" corresponding to "hit". If the determination in step S5105 is affirmative, the process ends after turning on the long small hit generation flag in step S5106.

Also, if the determination in step S5105 is negative, that is, if it is determined to be a "short-time small win", in step S5107, the short-time small win occurrence flag is turned on, and then this process ends.

Next, the variation time determination process in step S507 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the time reduction mode is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S5201, in step S5202, the 0.1 second variation flag indicating that the variation time of the variation display performed on the special display device 43 is 0.1 seconds is set to on. , the process ends. That is, in the time shortening mode, regardless of whether the lottery result is a big win, a small long win, a small short win, or a loss, the fluctuation time of the corresponding fluctuation display is uniformly set to 0.1 second.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5201, in step S5203, it is determined whether or not the long small hit generation flag has been set in the success/failure determination process performed immediately before. If the determination in step S5203 is affirmative, that is, if it is determined to be a "long small win", in step S5204, the value of the variation time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special variation reservation area is set to "0". , 1”.

If a negative determination is made in step S5204, that is, if the value of the variable time selection counter C2 is any one of "3 to 9", then in step S5205, the variable display performed by the special display device 43 is displayed as a variable time. After turning on the 3-second variation flag indicating that the time is 3 seconds, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination in step S5204 is affirmative, in step S5206, after turning on the 2-second variation flag indicating that the variation time of the variation display performed on the special display device 43 is 2 seconds, this processing is executed. finish.

Also, if the determination in step S5203 is negative, it is determined in step S5207 whether or not the short-circuit small hit occurrence flag is ON. If the determination in step S5207 is affirmative, that is, if a "short hit" occurs, in step S5208, the value of the variable time selection counter C2 newly stored in the special variable holding area is "0, 1". Determines whether or not it matches with either of

If the determination in step S5208 is affirmative, in step S5205, the 3-second variation flag indicating that the variation time of the variation display performed on the special display device 43 is set to ON for 3 seconds, and then this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S5208, in step S5206, the 2-second variation flag indicating that the variation time of the variation display performed on the special display device 43 is set to ON for 2 seconds, and then this process is executed. finish. That is, there is a higher possibility that a longer variation time (3 seconds) is selected when a "long small win" occurs than when a "short small win" occurs.

In addition, if the determination in step S5207 is negative, that is, in the case of a big hit or a loss, in step S5209, a 7-second variation indicating that the variation time of the variation display performed on the special display device 43 is 7 seconds. After turning on the flag, this processing ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, after the process of step S508, or when a negative determination is made in step S502, in step S509, whether or not the game ball has won the second start winning device 33b is determined by the second start It is determined by the detection information of the winning switch 224b. If a negative determination is made in step S509, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, the suspension counter Na is incremented by one in step S510.

In the subsequent step S511, each value of the winning random number counter C1 and the variation time selection counter C2 is stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas of the special variation reservation area. In step S512, a win/fail determination process is performed. The success/failure determination process in step S512 is the same as the success/failure determination process in step S506, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In subsequent step S513, fluctuation time determination processing is performed. The suitability determination process in step S513 is the same as the fluctuation time determination process in step S507, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. After step S513, in step S514, a preceding command setting process is performed, and this process ends.

Next, the through gate passage processing in step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined based on the detection information of the through gate switch 225. FIG.

If a negative determination is made in step S601, this process is terminated. On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, then in step S602, the number of suspensions of variable display performed by the normal symbol display device 41 is counted. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S602, that is, if it is confirmed that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, and the value of the normal reservation counter Nc is <4, the process proceeds to step S603, and the normal reservation counter is reached. Increment Nc by one.

In addition, in the following step S604, a random number related to success or failure is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C3 updated in the random number update process of step S303 is stored in the first area of the free storage areas of the normal fluctuation reservation area of the RAM503. After that, the through gate passage processing ends.

Next, the entering ball counting process in step S306 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7201, it is determined whether or not the first incoming ball count switch 437a provided in the first introduction passage 718a is detected. If the determination in step S7201 is affirmative, it is determined in step S7202 whether or not the second incoming ball count switch 437b provided in the second introduction passage 718b has been detected. If a negative determination is made in step S7202, in step S7203, a first ball entering command is sent to the sub-control device 262 to notify that the ball has entered the first ball entering opening 403a (first introduction passage 718a) side. set.

After step S7203, in step S7204, 1 is added to the value of the entering ball counter as the first counting means for grasping the number of game balls in the specific area 401. FIG. In the following step S7205, setting processing of a monitoring timer that is taken into account in the remaining ball monitoring processing is performed. In this embodiment, "10000" is set to the watchdog timer each time the incoming ball count switch 437 is detected. Also, even if a predetermined numerical value has already been set in the watchdog timer, it will be overwritten with "10000". Incidentally, the monitoring timer is decremented by one in normal processing (remaining ball monitoring processing to be described later) which is performed every 4 mecs. After step S7205, this process ends.

Also, if the determination in step S7202 is affirmative, that is, if both the first ball count switch 437a and the second ball count switch 437b are detected, in step S7206, the sub-control device 262 Both ball entry command to notify that a ball has entered both the first ball entry opening 403a (first introduction passage 718a) side and the second ball entry opening 403b (second introduction passage 718b) side. set.

As described above, the first entering ball count switch 437a and the second entering ball count switch 437b are located at the same distance from each exit in the vicinity of the exits of the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b. is provided, and when game balls are detected (almost) simultaneously by the first entering ball count switch 437a and the second entering ball count switch 437b, each of the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b The game balls are ejected from the exit at substantially the same time, and the game balls fall to the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715 of the route sorting device 703 at the same time.

After step S7206, in step S7207, 2 is added to the value of the entering ball counter as the first counting means for grasping the number of game balls in the specific area 401. FIG. After that, the monitoring timer is set in step S7205 described above, and then this processing ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S7201, it is determined in step S7208 whether or not the second incoming ball count switch 437b has been detected. If a negative determination is made in step S7208, this processing ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7208, in step S7209, the second controller notifies the sub-control device 262 that the ball has entered the second ball entrance opening 403b (second introduction passage 718b). 2 Set the ball-in command.

After step S7209, the value of the incoming ball counter is incremented by 1 in step S7204, and the monitoring timer is set in step S7205, after which this processing ends.

When the sub-control device 262 receives the first ball entry command, it derives the normal ball entry effect sound, and also derives a first ball entry command (not shown) arranged behind the first wing portion 714 of the route sorting device 703 . When the ball entry lamp is turned on and the second ball entry command is received, the normal ball entry effect sound is derived, and a second ball entry (not shown) arranged behind the second wing portion 715 of the route sorting device 703 is generated. When the lamps are turned on and both ball-entering commands are received, a special ball-entering effect sound is derived, and the first ball-entering lamp and the second ball-entering lamp are rapidly blinked.

Next, the special winning process in step S307 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7301, it is determined whether or not there is game ball detection information by the special ball entry detection switch 461 . If a negative determination is made in step S7301, this processing ends.

On the other hand, when the affirmative determination is made in step S7301, in step S7302, it is determined whether or not it is in a big hit state by referring to a flag during a big hit, which will be described later. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7302, this process ends. That is, during the jackpot state, even if a game ball enters the safe path 427 through the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 and the game ball is detected by the special ball detection switch 461, The right to generate a jackpot state is not granted.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7302, it is determined in step S7303 whether or not the special winning flag indicating that the special ball entry detection switch 461 has been detected has already been turned on. If an affirmative determination is made in step S7303, this processing ends. That is, in a state where it has already been determined to generate a jackpot state (the right to generate a jackpot state is granted), even if the detection of the special ball detection switch 461 is performed again, that amount The jackpot of is invalid.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S7303, the special prize winning flag is turned on in step S7304, and then this processing ends. In the present embodiment, when the special ball detection switch 461 is detected, only the right to generate the jackpot state is given, and it is decided which type of jackpot state is given. Moreover, the jackpot state is not started until the type is determined.

Next, the non-special winning process of step S308 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7401, it is determined whether or not there is detection information of a game ball by the non-special entering ball detection switch 462 or not. If a negative determination is made in step S7401, this processing ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7401, the value of the incoming ball counter is decremented by 1 in step S7402, and then this processing ends.

Next, the early detection processing in step S309 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7501, it is determined whether or not the 3R early detection switch 753 has been detected. When the determination in step S7501 is affirmative, in step S7502, a 15R jackpot flag indicating a 15 round jackpot, a 7R jackpot flag indicating a 7 round jackpot, or a 3R jackpot indicating a 3 round jackpot. It is determined whether or not any one of the jackpot flags is set to ON.

If a negative determination is made in step S7502, that is, if the type of the jackpot state has not yet been determined, in step S7503, the 3R early detection switch 753 detects that the 3R early detection switch 753 is detected. After turning on the detection flag, the process moves to step S7504. On the other hand, if the determination in step S7502 is affirmative, that is, if the type of the jackpot state has already been determined, the process proceeds directly to step S7504.

At subsequent step S7504, the value of the entering ball counter is decremented by 1, and at step S7505, the value of the clogged ball counter as second counting means for grasping the number of game balls in the specific area 401 is incremented by 1. After that, this process is terminated.

If the determination in step S7501 is negative, it is determined in step S7506 whether or not the 7R early detection switch 754 has been detected. If a negative determination is made in step S7506, this processing ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7506, it is determined in step S7507 whether or not any of the 15R big hit flag, 7R big win flag, or 3R big win flag is set to ON.

If the determination in step S7507 is negative, in step S7508 the 7R early detection flag indicating that the 7R early detection switch 754 has been detected is turned on, and then the process proceeds to step S7504. On the other hand, if the determination in step S7507 is affirmative, the process proceeds directly to step S7504. As described above, in step S7504, the value of the incoming ball counter is decremented by 1, and in step S7505, the value of the clogged ball counter is incremented by 1, and then this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 21, a description will be given of the type entry processing in step S310. First, in step S7601, it is determined whether or not the special prize winning flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S7601, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7601, it is determined in step S7602 whether or not the 15R incoming ball detection switch 734 has been detected. When the determination in step S7602 is affirmative, in step S7603, the 15R jackpot flag indicating that the 15 round jackpot is set to ON.

After that, in step S7604, the value of the incoming ball counter is decremented by 1, and this processing ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S7602, it is determined in step S7605 whether or not the 7R incoming ball detection switch 735 has been detected. When the determination in step S7605 is affirmative, in step S7606, a 7R jackpot flag indicating a 7R jackpot is turned on. After that, in step S7607, 1 is subtracted from the value of the clogged ball counter, and then this processing ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S7605, it is determined in step S7608 whether or not the 3R entering detection switch 736 has been detected. If a negative determination is made in step S7608, this processing ends. On the other hand, when the determination in step S7608 is affirmative, in step S7609, the 3R jackpot flag indicating the 3 round jackpot is turned on. Thereafter, in step S7607 described above, the value of the clogged ball counter is decremented by 1, and this process is terminated.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, which is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of the main controller 261 at the time of power failure is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. FIG.

That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like, a power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main controller 261. FIG. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts NMI interrupt processing. finish.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 311 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the backup area 513 a of the RAM 513 by such NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. to start the NMI interrupt processing in FIG. The contents are as described above.

Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This main process is activated upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, in order to set a predetermined value in the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control devices (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to become operable, for example, 1 Execute wait processing for about a second. In the following step S102, RAM access is permitted.

After that, data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501 . That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON). do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 has not been pressed, it is determined in the following step S104 whether or not the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 or not. Here, if it is not set, backup data is not stored, so in this case also, the process proceeds to step S111. If the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the subsequent step S106, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved at the time of power failure. , that is, determine the validity of the backup. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power failure, the backed-up data is destroyed, and in this case also, the process proceeds to step S111.

In the processing of step S111, an initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the sub-control device 262, the payout control device 311, etc., which are sub-side control devices. Thereafter, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S112, etc.). Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 503 . Instead of using this RAM determination value, it is also possible to determine the validity of the backup based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly saved.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323 when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 323 is ON, the process proceeds to RAM initialization processing (step S112, etc.). Also, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S112, etc.) is similarly performed. That is, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0 in step S112, and the initial value of the RAM 503 is set in the following step S113. After that, in step S114, interrupt permission is set, and the normal processing described later is performed.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), the condition is that power failure occurrence information is set and that the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Then, the power recovery process (power recovery process) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, and in step S108, power-off occurrence information is cleared. In step S109, a command is transmitted to return the sub-side control device to the game state at the time of power failure, and in step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM503.

After that, in step S114, interrupt permission is set, and the normal processing described later is performed.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. Main processing of the game is executed in this normal processing. As an overview, the processes of steps S201 to S212 are executed as regular processes with a period of 4 msec, and the initial value random number counter update process of step S215 is executed during the remaining time.

First, in step S201, a control signal based on the settings of the special display device 43 and the second start winning device 33b updated in the previous process is transmitted to each device, and output data such as a command is sent to each device on the sub side. Execute external output processing such as sending to the control device.

For example, when the decorative design display device 42 displays the decorative design in a variable manner, a variation pattern command or the like is transmitted to the sub-controller 262 . In other words, the variation pattern command is a command output to the sub-control device 262 in order to cause the decorative pattern display device 42 to perform a display effect that matches the display performed by the special display device 43, and is a command in this embodiment. Corresponds to information. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 which has input the variation pattern command or the like determines the variation mode of the decorative design display device 42 based on the command, and displays the variation mode on the decorative design display device 42. An instruction is issued to the control device 45 .

In step S202, the prize ball count signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S203, the abnormal payout signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

In the subsequent step S204, a jackpot setting process for the accessory is executed. In this process, a game ball entering the specific area 401 of the central winning unit 37 enters the special pocket portion 416a of the rotator unit 410 and is detected by the special ball detection switch 461. settings, etc. The details of this jackpot setting process will be described later.

In step S205, a first display control process is executed. In this process, the control content of the special display device 43 is set as to what kind of control is performed in the special display device 43, and the judgment of the big hit and the setting of the effect pattern of the decorative design in the decorative design display device 42 are performed. will be Details of the first display control process will be described later.

In step S206, a variable winning device control process is executed. In this processing, setting of control contents of the variable winning device 32 is performed as to what kind of control is performed in the variable winning device 32 . As a result, when the jackpot state (special game state) is reached, the opening/closing process of the variable winning device 32 (big winning opening) is repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds. The details of the variable winning device control process will be described later.

In step S207, blade member opening/closing processing is executed. In this process, the control details of the blade member 404 (blade solenoid 405) are set. Details of the blade member opening/closing process will be described later.

In step S208, a second display control process is executed. In this process, setting of the control contents of the normal design display device 41 is performed as to what kind of control is performed in the normal design display device 41 . The details of this second display control process will be described later.

In step S209, a trigger-responsive unit control process is executed. In this processing, setting of the control contents of the starting winning device 33 is performed as to what kind of control is performed in the starting winning device 33 . The details of the opportunity-responsive unit control process will be described later.

In step S210, a remaining ball monitoring process is executed. In this process, a process of confirming whether or not a game ball exists in the specific area 401 of the central winning unit 37 is performed. The details of the remaining ball monitoring process will be described later.

In step S211, preceding effect processing is executed. In this processing, after the right to generate a big win state is given by a game ball entering the central winning unit 37, the kind of big win is determined, and deterioration of the game tempo caused by the time lag until the start of the big win state is prevented. Processing for suppressing is performed. Details of the preceding effect processing will be described later.

In step S212, a character product driving process is performed. In this process, the process of operating the rotator unit 410, the slide unit 721, and the sorting device 741 of the central winning unit 37 is performed. That is, in the rotating body unit 410, the rotating body 414 is rotated counterclockwise at a constant speed in plan view, and in the slide unit 721, the slide member 722 is slid left and right at a predetermined rhythm (reciprocating motion), The type sorting device 741 is controlled to rotate the first cam 750 and the second cam 751 counterclockwise at a predetermined rhythm when viewed from the front.

After that, in step S213, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 or not. Here, if power-off occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, in step S214, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has come. Then, it is determined whether or not 4 msec) has elapsed. Then, if the predetermined time has already passed, an affirmative determination is made in step S214, the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes after step S201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S214 is negative, the process advances to step S215 to update the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this example). After the processing, the process proceeds to step S213. That is, at the time of determination in step S214, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated within the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing. will be executed repeatedly.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S212 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the winning random number counter C1) can be randomly updated.

Now, if the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S213: YES), it means that the power has been shut off, so the processes from step S216 onward are performed as power failure processing at the time of power failure. will be In the power failure process, first, in step S216, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited. In step S217, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area. memorize to After that, in step S219, a power cutoff notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to other control devices (payout control device 311, etc.). Then, in step S220, the RAM judgment value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of RAM 503 . Thereafter, in step S221, RAM access is prohibited, and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed.

It should be noted that the processing of step S213 is the timing at which a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed at steps S201 to S212 ends, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of step S215 performed within the remaining time. is running on Therefore, in the normal processing of the main controller 261, since information on occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data to be stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than when each processing is in progress. and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power shutdown, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored, and the processing load on the main controller 261 can be reduced. . Furthermore, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before data is stored (step S216), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is cut off, and the state before the power cut-off can be reliably stored. .

Next, the jackpot setting process of step S204 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a special winning flag (see special winning processing in FIG. 18) indicating that a game ball has been detected by the special entering ball detection switch 461 is on. If a negative determination is made in step S1501, this process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S1501 is affirmative, the process advances to step S1502 to turn off the special winning flag.

In the subsequent step 1503, it is determined whether or not the 15R jackpot flag indicating that the game ball has been detected by the 15R ball detection switch 734 is set to ON. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1503, in step S1504, "15" is set in a round number counter for grasping the number of remaining rounds in the jackpot state. Furthermore, in step S1505, a flag during a big win indicating that the game is in a jackpot state is set to ON, and in step S1506, a first variable flag indicating that the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 32 is in progress is set to ON. In addition, in step S1507, the first variable timer used for opening/closing control of the variable winning device 32 is set to "7500", and in step S1508, the winning counter is set to "8", and then this process ends. do.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S1503, in step S1509, it is determined whether or not the 7R jackpot flag indicating that the game ball has been detected by the 7R entering ball detection switch 735 is set to ON. If the determination in step S1509 is affirmative, in step S1510 the round number counter is set to "7".

After step S1510, in step S1511, it is determined whether or not a preceding opening effect, which will be described later in detail, is being performed. Incidentally, the opening performance is performed at the beginning of the big win state, and is a performance for announcing the start of the big win state (and raising the excitement). On the other hand, the preceding opening effect means that the game ball that has entered the 3R guide passage 743 or the 7R guide passage 745 has not yet been detected by the 3R entrance detection switch 736 or the 7R entrance detection switch 735. In spite of the state, it is certain that the game ball will eventually be detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 or the 7R ball entry detection switch 735, and the corresponding jackpot state will be given. Pseudo performance simulating the opening performance derived for the purpose of teaching that a corresponding jackpot state occurs at the time when the 3R early detection switch 753 or the 7R early detection switch 754 is detected. is. In this embodiment, although the preceding opening effect is not performed during the period of the jackpot state, almost the same aspect as the opening effect (display aspect of the decorative pattern display device 42, sound aspect, lighting aspect of various lamps) is derived. is configured as

If the determination in step S1511 is affirmative, in step S1512, settings are made to execute the 3R jackpot (or 7R jackpot) in a "shortened pattern". Although details will be described later, the 3R jackpot or 7R jackpot state includes a normal pattern in which an opening period for performing an opening effect is set and a shortened pattern in which the opening period is omitted. Therefore, when the preceding opening performance is being performed, a pattern in which the opening performance in the jackpot state is omitted is selected instead, thereby avoiding the opening performance from becoming too long.

After step S1512, or when a negative determination is made in step S1511, the process proceeds to step S1505 described above.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step S1509, in step S1513, it is determined whether or not the 3R jackpot flag indicating that the game ball has been detected by the 3R entrance detection switch 736 is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S1513, this processing ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S1513 is affirmative, in step S1514, the round number counter is set to "3". After that, the process proceeds to step S1511 described above.

Next, the first display control processing in step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the jackpot state flag is referred to. If the determination in step S801 is affirmative, that is, if the game is in the jackpot state, the process ends. That is, during the jackpot state, the variable display is not newly started.

When a negative determination is made in step S801, it is determined in step S802 whether or not a special prize winning flag indicating that a game ball has been detected by the special entering ball detection switch 461 is on. In addition, the special winning flag is set to ON when the special winning ball detection switch 461 is detected (see step S7304 of the special winning processing), and is turned OFF when the jackpot flag is turned ON (accessories described later). (See step S1502 of the jackpot setting process). If an affirmative determination is made in step S802, this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S802, it is determined in step S803 whether or not the open fluctuation flag is set to ON. In addition, the open fluctuation flag enters the specific area 401 when the blade member 404 is displaced to the open position based on the small win and the central winning unit 37 is in the open state (the specific area 401 is open). The ball is still in the specific area 401, and the special winning flag is turned on, not in a jackpot state.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S803, this process is terminated. In other words, when the central winning unit 37 is open, the special display device 43 does not perform the variable display.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S803, it is determined in step S804 whether or not the special display device 43 is performing variable display by looking at the setting state of the first display flag. When the first display flag is turned on, it is considered that the variable display is being performed, and when the first display flag is turned off, it is considered that the variable display is not performed. Although details will be described later, the flag during the first display is turned on when the variable display of the special display device 43 is started (see step S808), and when the variable display of the special display device 43 is stopped and displayed ( (see step S812).

Then, if a negative determination is made in step S804, that is, the jackpot state, the state in which the right to the jackpot state has been granted but the jackpot state has not yet started, the variable display of the special display device 43, and the central winning unit. 37 is not in any state of opening, the process proceeds to step S805, and the value of the suspension counter Na that counts the number of suspensions of the variable display triggered by the ball entering the starting prize winning devices 33a and 33b is greater than 0. Determine whether it is larger or not. If a negative determination is made in step S805, that is, if not even one variable display is retained and stored, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S805, that is, if at least one variable display is retained and stored, 1 is subtracted from the value of the retention counter Na in step S806.

In subsequent step S807, a process of shifting the data stored in the special change reservation area is executed. This shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth holding areas of the special variable holding area to the execution area side, and the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → holding The data in each area is shifted such as the first area, the third reserved area→the second reserved area, the fourth reserved area→the third reserved area, and so on. In addition, in the shift process, not only the value of the winning random number counter C1 and the variable time selection counter C2, but also the big hit occurrence flag, the out flag, the long small win occurrence flag, the short small win occurrence flag, the 2-second variation flag, and the 3-second The ON/OFF setting states of the fluctuation flag and the 7-second fluctuation flag are also shifted.

In the subsequent step S808, variable display setting processing is performed. Details of the variable display setting process will now be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the variation information corresponds to "big hit" by determining whether or not the big hit generation flag in the execution area of the special variation reservation area is set to ON. In addition, as a modification, the value of the winning random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special change reservation area is the value corresponding to the jackpot, by referring to the winning judgment table again in the same way as the winning judgment processing of the start winning processing. It may be determined whether or not it is "0".

If affirmative determination is made in step S901, that is, if a "jackpot" is won in the lottery, in step S902, a direct hit indicating that a "jackpot" has been won in the lottery (a "direct hit"). Turn on the jackpot flag. After step S902, in step S903, it is determined whether or not the 7-second variation flag in the execution area of the special variation reservation area is set to ON.

If the determination in step S903 is affirmative, in step S904, a variation pattern command to determine a variation pattern (jackpot variation pattern) to be a jackpot and to transmit the variation pattern (variation information) to the sub-control device 262 settings. In the following step S905, the first display timer used for variation control of the special display device 43 is set to a value "1750" corresponding to 7 seconds. The first display timer is means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of the fluctuation display) in the special display device 43, and is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation display. . After step S905, the process proceeds to step S938.

Further, if the determination in step S903 is negative, in step S906, a variation pattern (jackpot shortening pattern) that shortens the variation time and becomes a big hit is determined, and further, the variation pattern (variation information) is sent to the sub control device. In order to transmit to H.262 as well, a variation pattern command is set. In the following step S907, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set to the first display timer used for variation control of the special display device 43. FIG. After step S907, the process proceeds to step S938.

Also, if the determination in step S901 is negative, it is determined in step S908 whether or not the deviation flag in the execution area of the special variation holding area is set to ON, thereby determining whether or not it is "out". As a modification, in the same manner as the success/failure determination process of the starting winning process, it is again determined whether or not the value of the winning random number counter C1 in the execution area is "1". It may be determined.

If the determination in step S908 is affirmative, that is, if it is "out", in step S909 it is determined whether or not the 7-second variation flag in the execution area of the special variation reservation area is set to ON. If the determination in step S909 is affirmative, in step S910, a variation pattern to be out (outlier variation pattern) is determined, and a variation pattern command is set to transmit the variation pattern to the sub-controller 262. I do. Thereafter, in step S911, after setting the value "1750" corresponding to 7 seconds to the first display timer, the process proceeds to step S938.

If a negative determination is made in step S909, in step S912, a variation pattern (loss shortening pattern) that shortens the variation time and causes a deviation is determined, and furthermore, the variation pattern (variation information) is transmitted to the sub-controller. In order to transmit to H.262 as well, a variation pattern command is set. In the following step S913, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set to the first display timer used for variation control of the special display device 43. FIG. After step S913, the process proceeds to step S938.

If a negative determination is made in step S908, that is, if it is a "small hit", the blade open flag is turned on in step S914. In the following step S915, it is determined whether or not the long small hit occurrence flag in the execution area of the special change reservation area is ON. As a modification, in the same way as the success/failure determination process of the starting winning process, it is determined again whether the value of the variable time selection counter C2 in the execution area matches any one of "2 to 21". It may be determined whether or not the "Long Small Win" has been won.

If the determination in step S915 is affirmative, that is, if it is a "long small win", it is determined in step S916 whether or not the 3-second variation flag of the execution area is set to ON. If the determination in step S916 is affirmative, in step S917, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 3 seconds, followed by a variable pattern in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. A variation pattern) is determined, and a variation pattern command is set in order to transmit the variation pattern to the sub-controller 262 as well.

In the subsequent step S918, a value "750" corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S919, the open/close control timer used for the open/close control of the blade member 404 is set to "750" corresponding to 3 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the variable display for 3 seconds. After that, the process moves to step S938.

Further, if the determination in step S916 is negative, it is determined in step S920 whether or not the 2-second variation flag of the execution area is set to ON. If an affirmative determination is made in step S920, in step S921, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 2 seconds, followed by a variable pattern in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds (long small per 2 seconds A variation pattern) is determined, and a variation pattern command is set in order to transmit the variation pattern to the sub-controller 262 as well.

In the following step S922, a value "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set in the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S923, the opening/closing control timer is set to "500" corresponding to 2 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the variable display for 2 seconds. After that, the process moves to step S938.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S920, in step S924, a variation pattern (long small hit shortening pattern) that shortens the variation time and becomes a long small hit is determined, and further, the variation pattern (variation information) is also sent to the sub-controller 262, a variation pattern command is set.

In the subsequent step S925, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set to the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S926, "25" corresponding to 0.1 second is set to the opening/closing control timer. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the variable display for 0.1 seconds. After that, the process moves to step S938.

Also, if the determination in step S915 is negative, that is, if it is a "short hit", it is determined in step S927 whether or not the 3-second variation flag of the execution area is set to ON. If the determination in step S927 is affirmative, in step S928, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 3 seconds and then the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds. A variation pattern) is determined, and a variation pattern command is set in order to transmit the variation pattern to the sub-controller 262 as well.

In the following step S929, a value "750" corresponding to 3 seconds is set in the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S930, the open/close control timer used for the open/close control of the blade member 404 is set to "750" corresponding to 3 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the variable display for 3 seconds. After that, the process moves to step S938.

If the determination in step S927 is negative, it is determined in step S931 whether or not the 2-second variation flag of the execution area is set to ON. If the determination in step S931 is affirmative, in step S932, the special display device 43 displays a variable display for 2 seconds, followed by a variable pattern in which the blade member 404 is opened for 1.5 seconds A variation pattern) is determined, and a variation pattern command is set in order to transmit the variation pattern to the sub-controller 262 as well.

In the following step S933, a value "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set to the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S934, the opening/closing control timer is set to "500" corresponding to 2 seconds. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the variable display for 2 seconds. After that, the process moves to step S938.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S931, in step S935, a variation pattern (short small winning shortening pattern) that shortens the variation time and becomes a short small winning is determined, and further, the variation pattern (variation information) is also sent to the sub-controller 262, a variation pattern command is set.

In the following step S936, a value "25" corresponding to 0.1 seconds is set to the first display timer. Furthermore, in step S937, "25" corresponding to 0.1 second is set to the opening/closing control timer. As a result, the blade member 404 is opened after the special display device 43 performs the variable display for 0.1 second. After that, the process moves to step S938.

In step S938, the first display flag indicating that the special display device 43 is performing variable display is turned on. After step S938, the process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 23, if the determination in step S804 is affirmative, that is, if the variable display is in progress, the process advances to step S809 to perform first display timer subtraction processing. That is, the value of the first display timer is decremented by one every 4 msec.

Subsequently, in step S810, the value of the first display timer after the subtraction is taken into account to determine whether or not the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed. At this time, when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the first display timer becomes "0", affirmative determination is made in step S810.

If a negative determination is made in step S810, in step S811, switching display setting is performed to continue the switching display (variable display) of the special display device 43, and this processing ends. Based on the contents of the switching display setting, a control signal is output to the special display device 43 to perform switching display in the next external output process in the normal process. Specifically, the combination of lamps to be lit is set to be switched sequentially. As a result, switching display (variable display) of the special display device 43 is realized at the timing of the first display control process, that is, every 4 msec.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S810 is affirmative, that is, if the time has come to stop the variable display in the special display device 43, the first display flag is turned off in step S812.

In the following step S813, the stop display setting for performing the stop display on the special display device 43 is performed. Based on the setting contents of this stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display device 43 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. That is, in the case of a "jackpot", a plurality of lamps constituting the special display device 43 are stopped (for example, lit for a few seconds) in a mode (combination) corresponding to the "jackpot", and the result is a "loss". If it is a "long small win", it is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to "out", and if it is a "long small win", it is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to "long small win", and if it is a "short small win". Stop and display in a mode corresponding to "short win".

In subsequent step S814, determination information setting processing is performed. The details of the determination information setting process will be described later. After step S814, the process ends.

Here, the determination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 25 .

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the direct hit big hit flag is set to ON. If affirmative determination is made in step S1001, that is, if it is determined that a big win has been won in the winning lottery, the big win setting after step S1002 is performed.

Specifically, in step S1002, a flag during a jackpot indicating whether or not a jackpot state as a special game state is set to ON.

In the subsequent step S1003, the first variable flag indicating whether or not the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening) is in the open state is turned on. In this embodiment, the variable winning device 32 is opened when the first variable flag is turned on.

Subsequently, in step S1004, a first variable timer, which is a means for measuring the opening time of the variable winning device 32 and the like and indicates whether or not a specified time has passed since the start of opening, is set. In this example, "7500" corresponding to 30 seconds is set as the value for the first variable timer. As a result, the maximum open time per round (the longest time the variable winning device 32 is open) is 30 seconds.

Next, in step S1005, a round number counter indicating the number of rounds to be executed during the jackpot state (the number of occurrences of the special prize state, that is, the number of executions of the opening/closing process of the variable winning device 32) is set. Here, "15" indicating the total number of rounds is set as the value corresponding to the "direct hit big win".

In the subsequent step S1006, after performing the setting processing of the winning counter for counting the number of game balls that have entered the variable winning device 32, this processing ends. In this example, the value is set to "8", which indicates the maximum number of balls entered per round. In the switch reading process (see FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt process, it is determined by the detection information of the count switch 223 whether or not a ball has entered the variable winning device 32. When determined, the value of the winning counter is decremented by one.

If it is determined in step S1001 that the game does not correspond to the big win, that is, if it is determined to be out, the process proceeds to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation number counter is set. The fluctuation number counter is means for measuring the duration of the time reduction mode (high ball entry state). In the present embodiment, the time shortening mode is until the special display device 43 performs four fluctuation displays after the end of the jackpot state, and as will be described later, "4" is set as the counter value after the end of the jackpot. .

Here, if the counter value of the variation number counter is "0", this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the fluctuation number counter is set (when the counter value is other than "0"), it is considered that the time reduction mode is in progress, and in step S1008, the value of the fluctuation number counter is subtracted by 1, and step The process proceeds to S1009.

In step S1009, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the fluctuation number counter is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the current variation display is the fourth variation display after the end of the big win (after the time reduction mode is applied). Here, if the value of the fluctuation number counter is "0", a process of turning off the time reduction mode flag is performed in step S1010, a process of turning on the normal mode flag is performed in step S1011, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1009 that the counter value of the fluctuation number counter is not "0", this processing ends.

Next, the variable winning device control processing in step S206 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S1201, the flag during the big hit is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the game is in the middle of the big hit. If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is.

If the determination in step S1201 is affirmative, the count value of the first variable timer is subtracted by 1 in step S1202. In the subsequent step S1203, it is determined whether or not the first variable flag is ON.

If the determination in step S1203 is affirmative, that is, if the variable winning device 32 is open, the process proceeds to step S1204, and whether or not the count value of the first variable timer is "0", that is, the step In S1204, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the variable prize winning device 32 per round, which is set when the first variable flag is turned on, remains.

If a negative determination is made in step S1204, the process proceeds to step S1205 to determine whether the value of the winning counter is "0", that is, the number of game balls winning the variable winning device 32 per round. It is determined whether or not a specified number (eight in this example) has been reached. If a negative determination is made in step S1205, that is, if the timing for closing the variable prize winning device 32 (timing for ending the round) has not yet arrived, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S1204 or step S1205 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S1206 to determine whether the counter value of the round number counter is "0", that is, the number of rounds (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened ) has reached a specified number of times.

If the determination in step S1206 is affirmative, end setting processing is performed in step S1207, and this processing ends. Details of the end setting process will be described later.

If the determination in step S1206 is negative, that is, if the number of rounds has not reached the specified number of times, in step S1208, round forward processing is performed, and this processing ends. In the round forwarding process, 1 is subtracted from the value of the round number counter. In other words, the opening/closing process of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly performed until the number of executed rounds reaches the predetermined number of times. Also, in the round forwarding process, the first variable flag is turned off, and a wait time (interval time) until the next round is started is set for the first variable timer.

If the determination in step S1203 is negative, that is, if it is during the interval period between rounds, the process advances to step S1209 to determine whether or not the value of the first variable timer is "0". .

If the determination in step S1209 is affirmative, that is, if the interval period has ended and the timing for starting the next round has arrived, round start processing is performed in step S1210. In the round start process, the first variable flag is turned on, the opening time of the variable winning device 32 per round ("7500" in this example) is set for the first variable timer, and the winning counter is set to The maximum winning number per round ("8" in this example) is set. If the determination in step S1209 is negative, or if the round start process is completed in step S1210, this process ends.

Various control signals are output to the variable winning device 32 in the external output process of the next normal process based on the on/off state of the first variable flag. When the first variable flag is ON, a control signal for opening the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening) is output, and the variable winning device 32 is in an open state. On the other hand, when the first variable flag is off, a control signal for closing the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening) is output, and the variable winning device 32 is closed.

Here, the end setting processing in step S1207 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S1301, the first variable flag is turned off. In the following step S1302, the jackpot middle flag is turned off. After that, in step S1303, the time reduction mode flag is set to ON. That is, in the present embodiment, the time reduction mode is given after all the jackpot types of "direct hit jackpot", "15 round jackpot", "7 round jackpot", and "3 round jackpot" are finished. is configured as

After step S1303, the normal mode flag is turned off in step S1304. After that, in step S1305, "4" is set in the change number counter, and then the process proceeds to step S1306. That is, after the end of the jackpot, the time reduction mode is set until the variable display is performed four times. In step S1306, processing for turning off various jackpot flags is performed. After step S1306, the process ends.

Next, the blade member opening/closing process in step S207 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not the blade open flag (see step S908 of the variable display setting process) is turned on. If a negative determination is made in step S1801, this processing ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, it is determined in step S1802 whether or not an opening flag indicating that the blade member 404 is being opened is on. If a negative determination is made in step S1802, that is, if the wing member 404 is to be released by winning the "small win", the process proceeds to step S1803.

In step S1803, it is determined whether or not the value of the open/close control timer is "0". In addition, as described above, when it is determined that a "small win" is won in the variable display setting process, the opening/closing control timer corresponds to the same time as the variable display variable time performed by the special display device 43. A value is set (see steps S913, S916, S920, and S923). Therefore, at the same time when the corresponding variable display ends, the determination is also affirmative.

If the determination in step S1803 is negative, the value of the open/close control timer is decremented by 1 in step S1804, and this process ends. On the other hand, if the determination in step S1803 is affirmative, that is, if the timing for opening the blade member 404 has arrived, the open flag is turned on in step S1805, and the blade member 404 is opened in step S1806. Perform processing to make

After that, in step S1807, it is determined whether or not the long small hit generation flag in the execution area of the special change reservation area is set to ON. If the determination in step S1807 is affirmative, in step S1808, a value "375" corresponding to 1.5 seconds is set for the open/close control timer. On the other hand, if the determination in step S1807 is negative, in step S1809 a value "125" corresponding to 0.5 seconds is set for the open/close control timer. After steps S1808 and S1809, this processing ends.

If the determination in step S1802 is affirmative, it is determined in step S1810 whether or not the value of the open/close control timer is "0". If the determination in step S1810 is negative, the value of the opening/closing control timer is decremented by 1 in step S1811, and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S1810 is affirmative, that is, if it is time to close the blade member 404, the open flag is turned off in step S1812, and the blade open flag is turned off in step S1813. , in step S1814, the blade member 404 is closed, and then the process ends.

Next, the second display control processing of step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2101, whether or not switching display (variation display) is being performed by the normal design display device 41 by looking at the setting state of the second display flag indicating whether or not the normal design display device 41 is performing variable display. determine whether Specifically, when the second display flag is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is in the process of variable display, and when the second display flag is off, the normal symbol display device 41 varies. It is considered that the display is stopped, which corresponds to a state in which the display is stopped.

If the determination in step S2101 is negative, the process advances to step S2102 to determine whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is greater than zero. At this time, if the value of the normal reservation counter Nc is 0, the process is terminated.

If the variable display is not in progress and the value of the normal hold counter Nc>0, the process proceeds to step S2103. In step S2103, 1 is subtracted from the normal hold counter Nc. In step S2104, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal variation reservation area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserve areas of the normal variable reserve area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on.

Then, in step S2105, start setting processing is executed. In this processing, processing is performed to indicate that the condition for switching display (variation display) in the normal symbol display device 41 has been established. Specifically, the setting process of the second display timer is performed while turning on the second display flag. The second display timer is a means for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time) of the fluctuation display performed by the normal symbol display device 41, and is taken into consideration when determining whether a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation display. be done.

In the present embodiment, the time shortening mode, which is a high-injection state, and the normal mode, the variation time of the variable display in the normal symbol display device 41 is different, and in the time shortening mode, the second display timer is set to 0 A value "125" corresponding to .5 seconds is set, and in normal mode, a value "2500" corresponding to 15 seconds is set for the second display timer. Incidentally, during the jackpot state, "2500" is set for the second display timer as in the normal mode.

Based on the setting in the start setting process, when the control signal for starting switching display (variable display) is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the next normal process external output process, normal symbol display A switching display is started in the device 41 . After step S2105 ends, the second display control process ends.

Moreover, when affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, when variable display is being performed on the normal symbol display device 41, the process proceeds to step S2106, and the second display timer subtraction process is performed. Each time this process is performed, the count value of the second display timer is decremented by one.

Subsequently, proceeding to step S2107, it is determined whether or not the count value of the second display timer is "0", that is, whether or not the fluctuation time has elapsed. When the affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the flag during the second display is turned off in step S2108, and the normal symbol stop display setting for performing the stop display on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2109. Then, based on the setting contents of the normal symbol stop display setting, a control signal to the effect that the normal symbol display device 41 performs the stop display is output in the external output process in the next normal process.

In addition, as described above, it is determined whether or not winning is based on the value of the normal symbol random number counter C3 stored in the execution area of the normal variation reservation area. Specifically, "1 to 8" out of numerical values 0 to 9 of the normal symbol random number counter C3 are winning values.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2110, normal symbol discrimination information setting processing is performed, and this processing ends. In this process, when the stop display corresponds to winning, a setting process for opening and closing the starting prize winning device 33 is performed. Specifically, the second variable flag is turned on and the open time is set in the second variable timer.

The second variable flag is determination information for determining whether or not the second start-up winning device 33b (opening/closing member 33c) is in the open state.

The second variable timer is means for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the second starting prize winning device 33b, and is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a specified time has passed since the start of opening. In this embodiment, the opening time of the second start-up winning device 33b (opening/closing member 33c) is different between the time reduction mode which is a high ball winning state and the normal mode, and in the time reduction mode, the second variable timer A value "500" corresponding to 2 seconds is set for the second variable timer, and a value "100" corresponding to 0.4 seconds is set for the second variable timer in the normal mode. Incidentally, during the jackpot state, "100" is set for the second variable timer as in the normal mode.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2107, in step S2111, switching display setting is performed for continuing the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41, and this processing ends. Then, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, a control signal for performing switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41 in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Specifically, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to light up and display "○" or "-" as a normal symbol, and if the current lighting is "○", "-", "-" If so, the display is switched to "○". As a result, switching display (variation display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the second display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

Next, the trigger response unit control processing in step S209 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the second variable flag indicating whether or not the second starting prize winning device 33b (opening/closing member 33c) is in the open state is turned on. Here, if it is determined that the second variable flag is not ON (the second starting prize winning device 33b is in the closed state), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S2201 is affirmative, that is, if the second variable flag is ON, it is assumed that the second starting prize winning device 33b is open, and the second variable timer subtraction process is performed in step S2202. Each time this process is performed, the value of the second variable timer is decremented by one.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2203, and the value of the second variable timer after the above subtraction is taken into account to determine whether or not the specified opening time has elapsed. Here, when the specified opening time has passed, that is, when the value of the second variable timer becomes "0", affirmative determination is made in step S2203. If a negative determination is made here, the processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2204, and after performing end setting processing in step S2204, this processing ends. In the end setting process of step S2204, a process of turning off the second variable flag is performed.

Various control signals are output to the second starting winning device 33b in the external output process of the next normal process based on the ON/OFF state of the second variable flag. When the second variable flag is ON, a drive signal for opening the opening/closing member 33c is output to (the solenoid that drives) the second start-up winning device 33b, and the second start-up winning device 33b is opened. On the other hand, when the second variable flag is off, a drive signal for closing the opening/closing member 33c is output to the second start-up winning device 33b, and the second start-up winning device 33b is closed.

Next, the remaining ball monitoring process in step S210 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7101, it is determined whether or not the value of the incoming ball counter is "0".

Incidentally, as described above, the "entering ball counter" is incremented by 1 based on the detection of the entering ball count switch 437, and the non-special entering ball detection switch 462, 15R entry detection switch 734, 3R early detection switch 753, and , 7R is decremented by one based on the detection of early detection switch 754 . In addition, the "ball jam counter" is incremented by 1 based on the detection of the 3R early detection switch 753 and the 7R early detection switch 754, and based on the detection of the 3R incoming ball detection switch 736 and the 7R incoming ball detection switch 735. is decremented by 1. In other words, the ball-entering counter of the present embodiment is located downstream of the ball-entering count switch 437 in the specific area 401 and is located downstream from the 3R early detection switch 753, the 7R early-detection switch 754, and the 15R ball-entering detection switch 734. is configured to count the number of game balls present in the range on the upstream side.

When a negative determination is made in step S7101, in step S7102, the value of the monitoring timer for determining whether or not the specified time has elapsed since the game ball entered the specific area 401 last is set to " 0” is determined. In this embodiment, when the ball enters the specific area 401, "10000" is set to the monitoring timer. Therefore, the monitoring timer becomes "0" 40 seconds after the final ball is entered in the specific area 401.例文帳に追加In addition, in this embodiment, the time from when the game ball enters the specific area 401 to when it is discharged, more specifically, after the game ball is detected by the entering ball count switch 437, the game ball is not discharged. The time until detection by the special ball entry detection switch 462, 15R ball entry detection switch 734, 7R ball entry detection switch 735, or 3R ball entry detection switch 736 is approximately 8 to 30 seconds.

If the determination in step S7102 is negative, the value of the watchdog timer is decremented by 1 in step S7103, and this processing ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S7102, that is, even if the time assumed as the time from when the game ball enters the specific area 401 to when it is discharged has passed significantly, the entering ball counter (or If the value of the clogged ball counter) is not "0" and it is considered that clogged balls have occurred within the specific area 401, an error notification process is performed in step S7104. Concretely, for example, control is performed such as lighting an error lamp, outputting an error notification sound, and prohibiting the shooting of game balls. After that, this process is terminated.

Also, if the determination in step S7101 is affirmative, in step S7105, the number of game balls existing in the 3R guide path 743 and 7R guide path 745 provided in the specific area 401 (type lottery area 408) is specified. It is determined whether or not the value of the clogging counter is "0". As described above, the "ball clogging counter" is incremented by 1 based on the detection of the 3R early detection switch 753 and the 7R early detection switch 754, and the 3R incoming ball detection switch 736 and the 7R incoming ball detection switch 1 is subtracted based on detection of 735. In other words, the clogged ball counter of the present embodiment has the 3R guide passage 743 on the downstream side of the 3R early detection switch 753 and the upstream side of the 3R incoming ball detection switch 736 in the specific area 401, and the 7R early detection switch 754. It is configured to count the number of game balls present in the downstream side and the 7R guide passage 745 on the upstream side of the 7R incoming ball detection switch 735 .

If the determination in step S7105 is affirmative, that is, if it is determined that the game ball does not remain in the specific area 401, this processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination in step S7105 is negative, the process proceeds to step S7102.

Next, the preceding effect processing in step S211 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7701, it is determined whether or not the 3R early detection flag indicating that the 3R early detection switch 753 has been detected is set to ON. If the determination in step S7701 is affirmative, it is determined in step S7702 whether or not the value of the incoming ball counter is zero.

If the determination in step S7702 is affirmative, that is, in the specific area 401, the ball has not yet entered the out passage 428, the 15R entrance 731, the 3R guide passage 743, and the 7R guide passage 745, but the ball has entered. If there is no game ball that is likely to be jammed, in step S7703, whether or not the value of the ball clogging counter is 1, that is, in the specific area 401, the 3R early detection switch 753 is now detected. It is determined whether or not there are only game balls that have been played. If a negative determination is made in step S7703, that is, if there is a game ball in the specific area 401 other than the game ball detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 (out of the specific area 401, the 3R early detection switch 753 downstream 2 or more game balls in the area on the upstream side of the 3R entry detection switch 736, the downstream side of the 7R early detection switch 754, and the upstream area of the 7R entry detection switch 735 When there is an error state in which it is determined that there is no game ball in the specific area 401 even though the game ball detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 exists in the specific area 401 ), the process ends. Incidentally, when it is determined that there is no game ball in the specific area 401, error processing may be performed.

It should be noted that the time required from when the game ball is detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 to when it is detected by the 3R incoming ball detection switch 736 is approximately 8 seconds, and when the game ball is detected by the 7R early detection switch 754 The time required until the 7R incoming ball detection switch 735 detects it is approximately 4 seconds.

In addition, the time required from when a game ball is detected by the entering ball count switch 437 to when it is detected by the 15R entering ball detection switch 734 is approximately 17 to 22 seconds. After being detected, the time required to be detected by the 7R incoming ball detection switch 735 is approximately 22 seconds to 26 seconds, and after the game ball is detected by the incoming ball count switch 437, the 3R incoming ball detection switch 736 The time required for detection is approximately 26 to 30 seconds.

That is, when the 3R early detection switch 753 is detected, if the game ball does not exist in the specific area 401, the game ball detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 is detected by the 3R incoming ball detection switch 736. There is no possibility that another game ball will be detected by the 15R entering ball detection switch 734 or the 7R entering ball detection switch 735 before the game ball.

If the determination in step S7703 is affirmative, that is, if the game ball present in the specific area 401 is only one ball detected by the 3R early detection switch 753, in step S7704, to the sub-controller 262, A process of setting a 3R preceding opening command for deriving an opening performance corresponding to the "three-round big win" prior to the start of the big win state is performed.

That is, in the present embodiment, if there is no other game ball in the specific area 401 when the game ball enters the 3R guide passage 743, the occurrence of the 3-round jackpot is assured. It takes about 8 seconds from being detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 to being detected by the 3R incoming ball detection switch 736. ing). For this reason, the player may have a sense of incongruity that the big winning state does not start for a long time even though the occurrence of the big winning state for three rounds is certain. Therefore, in the step S7704, when the 3R early detection switch 753 is detected, the opening effect that announces the start of the big win state is derived to eliminate such concerns.

The jackpot state is the opening period for teaching the start of the jackpot state and the period in which the variable prize winning device 32 is in the open state. There are an interval period, which is a period in which the game is closed, and an ending period, which teaches the end of the jackpot state, and an opening performance is performed in the opening period.

The sub-control device 262 that has received the 3R preceding opening command performs processing for deriving the opening effect corresponding to the "3 rounds big win", but does not start the 3 rounds big win state, but only the big win. It only derives an effect for teaching the start of the state (there is no meaning of the opening period, and in that respect it is a pseudo opening effect). The 3-round jackpot state is started when a gaming ball is detected by the 3R incoming ball detection switch 736 .

Further, the opening effect derived based on the reception of the 3R preceding opening command (hereinafter referred to as "preceding opening effect") is detected by the 3R early detection switch 753, then detected by the 3R entering detection switch 736, It connects until the start of the jackpot state, and the derivation time is not constant (because it depends on the moving speed of the game ball, etc.). That is, the estimated time from when the game ball is detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 to when it is detected by the 3R incoming ball detection switch 736 is about 8 seconds. On the other hand, in the preceding opening effect corresponding to the 3R jackpot, in the first half (for example, 0 seconds to 7 seconds), a series of effect modes (video; in this example, almost the same as the opening effect) are derived, and the latter half is (For example, after 7 seconds), a short effect (moving image) is repeatedly derived so that even if it is interrupted at any time, it will be connected to the effect of the subsequent round period, so that there will be no discomfort. be.
) is derived.

Furthermore, for the 3-round jackpot and the 7-round jackpot, a normal pattern (first opening pattern) with an opening period and a shortened pattern (second opening pattern) with no opening period are set. . In this embodiment, the shortened pattern is selected when the preceding opening effect is derived. For example, the first opening pattern for the 3-round jackpot and the 7-round jackpot is set to "7 seconds", and a series of moving images is derived. The second opening pattern for the 3-round jackpot is set to "0 seconds". The second opening pattern of the 7-round jackpot is set to "3 seconds", and a loop animation following the opening effect derived based on the reception of the 7R preceding opening command, which will be described later, is derived.

After step S7704, in step S7705, the 3R early detection flag is turned off, and this process ends.

Also, if the determination in step S7702 is negative, that is, in the specific area 401, the game in which the ball has not yet entered any of the out passage 428, the 15R entrance 731, the 3R guide passage 743, and the 7R guide passage 745 If there is a ball (soon, there will be a gaming ball that may enter any of the 15R entrance 731, 3R guide passage 743, and 7R guide passage 745), in step S7706, sub A promotion reception display command for deriving a promotion reception display meaning such as "3R jackpot is expected to occur, but it may be changed to a more advantageous jackpot" is sent to the control device 262. set.

That is, for example, two game balls enter the type lottery area 408, the preceding game ball enters the 3R guide passage 743, and the following game ball is guided to the 15R guide passage 746, the preceding game ball Because there is a possibility that the subsequent game ball is detected by the 15R ball detection switch 734 before it is detected by the 3R ball detection switch 736, when the 3R early detection switch 753 is detected , Instead of performing a preceding opening effect that a 3R jackpot will occur, a promotion reception display that indicates that a promotion is being accepted (promotion acceptance state) that there is a possibility that a better jackpot will occur is derived.

As a result, at the stage when the 3R early detection switch 753 is detected, the decorative pattern display device 42 or the like can be produced. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a relatively long time lag occurs without any particular reaction corresponding to the detection of the 3R early detection switch 753 until the detections of 734, 735, and 736 are performed. After step S7706, in step S7705, the 3R early detection flag is turned off, and this process ends. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the function of deriving the promotion acceptance display to the decorative design display device 42 constitutes the promotion acceptance state teaching means. Also, the function of deriving the promotion acceptance display and the preceding opening effect constitutes the early teaching means.

If the determination in step S7701 is negative, it is determined in step S7707 whether or not the 7R early detection flag is set to ON. If a negative determination is made in step S7707, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S7707 is affirmative, it is determined in step S7708 whether or not the value of the incoming ball counter is zero. If the determination in step S7708 is affirmative, it is determined in step S7709 whether or not the value of the clogged ball counter is 1. If the determination in step S7709 is affirmative, that is, if the game ball present in the specific area 401 is only one ball detected by the 7R early detection switch 754, in step S7710, to the sub-control device 262, A process of setting a 7R precedent opening command for deriving an opening performance corresponding to the "7 round big win" prior to the start of the big win state is performed. After step S7710, in step S7711, the 7R early detection flag is turned off, and this process ends.

In addition, the opening performance derived based on the reception of the 7R preceding opening command is detected by the 7R early detection switch 754, is detected by the 7R incoming ball detection switch 735, and connects until the jackpot state is started. However, the derivation time is not constant (because it depends on the moving speed of the game ball, etc.). That is, the estimated time from when the game ball is detected by the 7R early detection switch 754 to when it is detected by the 7R entering ball detection switch 735 is about 5 seconds. On the other hand, in the preceding opening effect corresponding to the 7R jackpot, in the first half (for example, 0 seconds to 4 seconds), a series of effect modes (video; in this example, almost the same as the opening effect) are derived, and the latter half is (For example, after 4 seconds), a short effect (moving image) is repeatedly derived so that even if it is interrupted at any time, it will be connected to the effect of the subsequent round period so that there will be no discomfort. be.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step S7709, that is, if there is a game ball in the specific area 401 other than the game ball detected by the 7R early detection switch 754 (out of the specific area 401, the 3R early detection switch 753 In the area downstream of the 3R entry detection switch 736 and the upstream side of the 7R early detection switch 754 and the upstream area of the 7R entry detection switch 735, two game balls An error state has occurred in which it is determined that there are no game balls in the specific area 401 even though there are more than one game ball detected by the 7R early detection switch 754 in the specific area 401. case), the process skips step S7710, moves to step S7711, turns off the 7R early detection flag, and ends this process. Incidentally, when it is determined that there is no game ball in the specific area 401, error processing may be performed.

Also, if a negative determination is made in step S7708, in step S7712, to the sub-control device 262, "7R jackpot is scheduled to occur, but it may be changed to a more advantageous jackpot." A promotion reception display command is set for deriving a promotion reception display with such a meaning. After that, the 7R early detection flag is turned off in step S7711, and then this process is terminated.

Note that the processing of steps S7702, S7703, S7708, and S7709 constitutes the uncertain element determination processing, and the processing of setting the preceding opening command in steps S7704 and S7710, and the processing based on the reception of the preceding opening command. The process of deriving the preceding opening effect constitutes the preceding opening process.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, the reception interrupt processing will be described first with reference to FIG. 33, and then the main processing will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing reception interrupt processing executed by the payout control device 311. As shown in FIG. The reception interrupt process is a process that is executed by interrupting when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261 . When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, other processing executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is put on standby for a while, and reception interrupt processing is executed. When the reception interrupt process is executed, the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is first stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513 in step S3001, and the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is stored in step S3002. Turns on the command reception flag and terminates this reception interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referenced and stored in a predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is used to store the next received command in the next storage area. is updated.

In this embodiment, the reception processing of a command transmitted from the main controller 261 is performed by interrupt processing executed when the command is received. In timer interrupt processing, it is checked whether a command has been received before command determination processing (step S3201) is performed, and if a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on, and if the command has not been received, the process may proceed to the command determination process. In such a case, whether or not the command has been received is checked by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at predetermined intervals.

Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311, and this main processing is activated upon resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S3101, initial setting processing is executed upon power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer, and an interrupt mode is set. Then, in step S3103, RAM access is permitted, and in step S3104, an external interrupt vector is set.

After that, in step S3106, it is determined whether information on the occurrence of power failure is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 or not. If power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107. No, that is, the validity of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of RAM 513 . It is also possible to determine the effectiveness of the backup by checking whether the keywords written in a predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

If power failure occurrence information is not set in step S3106, or if backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) in step S3108, the process proceeds to initialization processing of the RAM 513 after step S3115. Transition.

At step S3115, the entire area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and at step S3116 the initial value of the RAM 513 is set. Thereafter, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step S3114 the interrupt is permitted.

On the other hand, on the condition that power failure occurrence information is set in step S3106, and that the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step S3108, processing at the time of power recovery process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before the power cutoff is restored, in step S3110, the power cutout occurrence information is cleared, and in step S3111, the payout permission flag for permitting the payout of prize balls is cleared. In step S3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. FIG. Further, in step S3114, interrupts are permitted.

After the interruption is permitted in step S3114, in the process of step S3122, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the information on the occurrence of power failure is set, it means that the power has been shut off, so the processing from step S3123 onwards is performed as power failure processing at the time of power failure. In the power failure process, first, in step S3123, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited, and in the next step S3124, command determination processing, which will be described later, is executed. After that, in step S3125, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area, in step S3126 the value of the stack pointer is stored in the backup area 513a, and in step S3127 the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 513a. , the RAM access is prohibited in step S3128, and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 513 .

In the processing of step S3122, the power failure occurrence information is confirmed after the processing that is performed when the power is turned on is completed. less and can be easily memorized. In addition, when returning to the state before the power shutdown, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, the return can be easily performed, and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. .

Next, timer interrupt processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is started periodically (with a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment).

In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S3201, a command from the main controller 261 is acquired, and determination processing of the command is performed.

Here, the command determination processing in step S3201 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on. The command reception flag is turned on when a command transmitted from main controller 261 is received in the above-described reception interrupt processing (see FIG. 33).

If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is off, no new command has been received from the main controller 261, so this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the command reception flag is on in step S3301, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing of steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

The type of command read out from the RAM 513 is discriminated in the processing of steps S3304 to S3306. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, in step S3305 it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command, and in step S3306 whether it is a prize ball command It is determined whether or not

If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a payout initialization command, it is determined whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on in step S3307. Since the controller 261 has instructed the initialization of the RAM 513, the work area (area) of the RAM 513 other than the stack area is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. After that, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and the payout permission of prize balls is set.

As described above, the main controller 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 initializes the RAM 513 after receiving the payout initialization command. is performed, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 is initialized are substantially the same. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261, the RAM 513 is initialized due to the timing of initialization being shifted, and control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of harmful effects. Also, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 is initialized, the payout permission of prize balls can be reliably set.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already turned on in step S3307, this command determination process is terminated without clearing the work area of the RAM 513 and initializing the RAM 513. FIG. That is, the process of step S3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized while the payout permission flag is set. Since the payout initialization command is a command that is transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, it will not be received with the payout permission flag turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 has recognized it as a payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set (step S3309) while the payout permission flag is turned on, it will not be paid out if there are prize balls remaining. A bad effect occurs and a loss is given to the player, but since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, the loss to the player can be prevented.

Also, if the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power shutdown, In order to permit the payout of prize balls, the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311. That is, when there is power-off occurrence information and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power-off, payout of prize balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is set to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

Furthermore, if the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is a prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), in step S3310, the received number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls and stored. , the payout permission flag is turned on in step S3311 to allow the payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the number of prize balls corresponding to the commands to the total number of prize balls stored in a predetermined buffer area. and memorize it. Since the payout of prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls is performed based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main controller 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command for instructing the payout of prize balls. . In addition, when the prize ball command is received, the payout permission is set immediately, so the prize balls can be paid out early for the win. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, so the read pointer is set to the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Updated.

It should be noted that the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO), nor a payout return command (step S3305: NO), nor a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process is ended without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, returning to the flowchart of FIG. 35, description will be made. When the command determination process ends, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing is terminated as it is. In other words, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main controller 261 .

On the other hand, if the determination in step S3202 is affirmative, the firing control device 312 is set to permit firing in step S3203, and the state return switch 321 is checked in step S3204. Execute the return operation. By this process, when the state recovery switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging occurs in the dispensing motor, the dispensing motor is rotated forward and reverse, and the ball clogging is resolved (returned to a normal state). .

Thereafter, in step S3205, setting of the lower tray full state or the lower tray full cancellation state is executed according to the change in the state of the lower tray 15. FIG. That is, the full state of the lower tray 15 is determined by the detection signal of the lower tray full switch. Perform state setting. Further, in step S3206, setting of the no-ball-in-tank state (out-of-ball state) or no-ball-in-tank canceled state (with-ball state) is executed according to the change in the state of the ball in the tank. That is, the no-ball-in-tank state is determined by the detection signal of the no-ball-in-tank switch, the no-ball-in-tank state, the no-ball-in-tank state is set, the no-ball-in-tank state, and the no-tank-ball canceled state are set. Run the settings.

After that, in step S3207, it is determined whether or not there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, it is notified.

Subsequently, a prize ball and rental ball payout control process is executed. Specifically, payout number setting processing is performed in step S3208, motor control state acquisition processing is performed in step S3209, and motor driving processing is performed in step S3210.

In step S3211, the state return switch 321 is checked, and on the condition that the ball removal is not possible and the ball removal operation is not started, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the ball removal process. In subsequent step S3212, control of vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on the condition that the ball is clogged. After that, it returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt processing.

Next, normal processing of the sub-controller 262 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main controller 261 has been received.

If a command has been received, the command is stored in the command buffer of RAM 553 in step S3902. A command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands sent from the main controller 261 . The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, and commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when a command is stored and read, the store pointer and read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

In subsequent step S3903, pending information storage processing is performed to store the variation information included in the preceding command in the pending information storage area provided in the RAM 553. FIG. In the starting command, as described above, information indicating whether the variable display is triggered by the entry of the first start winning device 33a (setting of the first start winning flag), and variation information corresponding to the jackpot. Information indicating whether there is (setting of flag for occurrence of big hit), information indicating whether it is a fluctuation display corresponding to long or short small hit (setting of flag for occurrence of long or short hit), correspondence to deviation Information indicating whether or not it is a variable display (setting of a deviation flag), information indicating the variable display time (setting of a 2-second variation flag, a 3-second variation flag, a 7-second variation flag, and a 0.1-second flag) is included.

The pending information storage area, like the special variable pending area of the main controller 261, comprises four pending areas (first pending area to fourth pending area) and one execution area. In the pending information storage area, the variation information included in the preceding command is stored chronologically in accordance with the reception history of the preceding command based on the variable display (information stored in the special variable pending area). By adopting this configuration, the sub-controller 262 can also grasp the fluctuation information stored in the special fluctuation reservation area of the main controller 261 .

Here, the hold information storage processing in step S3903 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not an advance command has been received (whether or not the advance command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). When an affirmative determination is made in step S4101, in step S4102, the pending counter Np for counting the pending number of variation information stored in the pending information storage area is incremented by one.

In the following step S4103, the variation information including the information on whether or not it is a big win, the information on whether or not it is a small win, the information on the variation time, etc. included in the starting command is stored in the first open reservation area of the reservation information storage area. Store in area. After that, in step S4104, the values of various counters used for determining the effect display contents are acquired, and the values are stored in the same holding area as the variation information is stored.

After performing the process of step S4104, or when a negative determination is made in step S4101, the process proceeds to step S4105, and whether or not the variation pattern command is received (whether the variation pattern command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 or not). If the determination in step S4105 is affirmative, the value of the pending counter Np is decremented by 1 in step S4106.

After step S4106, in step S4107, a process of shifting the data stored in the pending information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data (including flag information) stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the reserved information storage area to the execution area side. , second reservation area→first reservation area, third reservation area→second reservation area, fourth reservation area→third reservation area, and so on.

After the processing of step S4107 is performed, or if a negative determination is made in step S4205, this processing ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 37, after step S3903 or when a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, and whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal process is performed. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed since. If the predetermined time has already passed, the process moves to step S3905. On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the previous normal process, the process moves to step S3911.

In step S3905, update processing of various counters used for determining the effect display contents is executed. In the following step S3906, display setting processing is performed. Here, basically based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 when receiving the variation pattern command, various arithmetic processing such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and output setting of the command are performed. Therefore, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 is determined here, and a value corresponding to the variation time of the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer. At this time, the sub-control device 262 performs processing based on a table that associates the types of various effects (variation types) with variation pattern commands.

In addition, in the step S3906, whether or not the effect button 125 has been operated is also confirmed, and if the operation of the effect button 125 is confirmed, settings are made accordingly. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when "100" is set to the variation counter in the end setting process, or when the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1 in the determination information setting process, the command including that effect is mainly used. It is output from the control device 261 to the sub-control device 262, and the sub-control device 262 displays the remaining number of times on the decorative design display device 42 based on the command information.

In addition, the display command is, for example, a command for specifying a series of display effects from the start to the end of the variable display, or a command for specifying a display effect during the big win, and is information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553. A necessary display command is generated each time. Normally, the display commands related to the variable display generated by the sub-control device 262 are roughly divided into a group of normal variable data and a group of ready-to-win effect data. By sequentially outputting in accordance with a predetermined time order based on , a display effect corresponding to various variation patterns is performed. For example, the normal fluctuation data group consists of normal fluctuation data 1, normal fluctuation data 2, . n, data output is sequentially performed in the order of normal fluctuation data 1→2→ . . . , data output is performed in order of n.

In addition, the display control device 45 performs drawing processing according to a command from the sub-control device 262, and starts the variable display of the design on the decorative design display device 42. FIG. In addition, once the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main controller 261, the sub-control The effect display is continued under the cooperation of the device 262 and the display control device 45 .

In the lamp setting process of step S3907, the lighting pattern of the lamps/electrical decorations is set in order to synchronize with the display effects performed by the decorative pattern display device 42. FIG.

In the sound setting process of step S3908, the output pattern of the speaker 24 is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative design display device 42. FIG. Also, when a command related to sound such as notification of error occurrence is transmitted from the main controller 261, settings for performing these controls are also performed in step S3908.

In step S3909, a customer waiting effect (for example, a demo that is set to be displayed after a predetermined time has passed while the display effect corresponding to the variable display of the special display device 43 is not being performed on the decorative pattern display device 42). screen display) and other processing such as control settings.

At step 3910, an external output process is executed to transmit a control signal based on the settings made at steps S3905 to S3909 to each device. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when causing the decorative pattern display device 42 to perform a display effect corresponding to the variable display of the special display device 43 .

After the processing of steps S3905 to S3910 performed every 1 msec is executed, or if the determination in step S3904 is negative, the process proceeds to step S3911 to determine whether the RAM 553 stores information on occurrence of power failure. determine whether Note that the power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main controller 261 .

If the power-off occurrence information is not stored, the process advances to step S3912 to determine whether or not the RAM 553 has been destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to step S3901 and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 has been destroyed, the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3911 that power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step S3913. In the power-off processing, generation of interrupt processing is prohibited, and each output port is turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased. After executing the power-off process, the process loops infinitely.

As described in detail above, according to the present embodiment, the central winning unit 37 includes a normal path 701 for guiding a game ball that has entered the specific area 401 to the uppermost part of the lottery area 407, and a specific area 401. There is a special passage 702 for guiding the entered game ball to the midstream part of the success/fail lottery area 407, and the game ball passing through the special passage 702 is a slide unit 721 for determining whether or not to drop the game ball to an out passage 428.例文帳に追加It is possible to avoid sorting by For this reason, the special passage 702 is a passage in which a game ball entering the specific area 401 is more likely to reach the rotating body 414 than the normal passage 701, and by extension, the special pocket portion 416a. It is a passage with a high possibility of reaching the safe passage 427 in which the incoming ball detection switch 461 is installed (high expectation of big hit).

Furthermore, a junction point between a normal guide section 704 that guides a game ball that has entered the specific area 401 to the normal passage 701 and a special guide section 705 that guides a game ball that has entered the specific area 401 to the special passage 702. , a route sorting device 703 is provided. The route sorting device 703 of the present embodiment has a shaft portion 713 rotatably supported around a shaft pin 711 extending in the front-rear direction, and in a standard posture in equilibrium, the route sorting device 703 moves leftward from the shaft portion 713 . It has a first wing portion 714 protruding toward and a second wing portion 715 protruding rightward from the shaft portion 713 .

Then, by guiding the game balls one by one to the route sorting device 703, when the game ball falls on the first wing portion 714 or the second wing portion 715, the route sorting device 703 is guided by the weight of the game ball. rotates left or right. The guide surfaces 714a and 715a (upper surface) of the first wing portion 714 or the second wing portion 715 of the route sorting device 703 in the pivoted posture are configured to communicate with the normal guide portion 704. A game ball falling on the first wing portion 714 or the second wing portion 715 is guided to the normal guide portion 704 and further guided to the normal passage 701 .

On the other hand, a pair of left and right entrance passages 718 ( Two game balls are simultaneously guided to the route sorting device 703 from the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b), and the two game balls fall simultaneously to the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715. In this case, the weight of the first wing portion 714 side and the weight of the second wing portion 715 side are balanced, so that the reference posture of the route sorting device 703 is maintained. Guide surfaces 714a and 715a (upper surfaces) of the first wing portion 714 or the second wing portion 715 of the route sorting device 703 in the reference posture are configured to communicate with a pair of left and right special guide portions 705, respectively. Both of the game balls falling on the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715 are guided to the special guide portion 705 and further guided to the special passage 702 .

As a result, it is possible to match the collective entry of a plurality of game balls into the specific area 401 with the increase in the expectation of entry into the special pocket portion 416a. For this reason, since a plurality of game balls are collectively entered into the specific area 401, the player's expectation that the game balls will be entered into the special pocket portion 416a will work in an advantageous manner. By guiding a plurality of game balls to the special passage 702, it is possible to increase the expectation of the ball entering the special pocket portion 416a. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which even if a plurality of game balls enter the specific area 401 collectively, it does not contribute to the degree of expectation for a big hit, or rather decreases. It is possible to derive the behavior of the game balls that meets the player's expectations, such as increasing the expectation of a big win by making the game balls enter collectively.

Further, for example, in the route sorting device 703, compared with the case of using an elastic body such as a spring or rubber, it is possible to prevent problems caused by deterioration of the elastic body. Furthermore, there is no need to provide a driving means for driving the route sorting device 703, and the configuration and control can be simplified and made compact. In addition, compared to a configuration in which a switch for detecting game balls and a driving means are used to switch the route depending on whether there are a plurality of game balls, it is possible to prevent doubts that cause a player to feel distrust. can be reduced, and fairness can be appealed.

Furthermore, a pair of ball entry openings 403 (first ball entry opening 403a, second ball entry opening 403b) is provided, and a game ball entering a specific area through the first ball entry opening 403a is A game ball entering the specific area 401 through a first introduction passage 718a that guides to the first wing portion 714 (drops onto the guide surface 714a of the first wing portion 714) and a second ball entering opening 403b A second introduction passage 718b is provided for guiding to the second wing portion 715 (dropping onto the guide surface 715a of the second wing portion 715). As a result, it is possible to increase the chances that the game ball is brought into contact with the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715 at the same time, and to determine the position at which the game ball is dropped at a suitable position. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances that a plurality of game balls entering the specific area 401 are all guided to the special passage 702 . In addition, it is possible to impart a playability such that a game ball is made to enter (aim or desire) into either of the left and right ball entry openings 403a and 403b.

Further, according to this embodiment, after the game ball entering the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 is detected by the special entering ball detection switch 461 through the safe path 427, It is configured to enter a type lottery area 408 that is a part of the specific area 401 instead of being ejected into the designated area 401 . Then, the game ball that has entered the type lottery area 408, 15R ball entrance 731 provided in the type lottery area 408, 7R ball entrance 732, and 3R ball entrance 733 enter the jackpot state. An analog lottery (type lottery) is held to determine the type of. Therefore, when game balls continuously enter the two special pocket portions 416a of the rotating body 414, the given big hit state is first detected by the special ball entry detection switch 461 among the game balls that have continuously passed. All of a plurality of game balls that enter the special ball entry detection switch 461 almost continuously, although it is one time corresponding to the game ball that has been detected, can be utilized for subsequent type lottery.

Furthermore, the time from when the game ball enters the type lottery area 408 until it is detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 that triggers the occurrence of the "3 round jackpot" is the time when the game ball enters the type lottery area 408. It is configured to be longer than the time from when it is detected by the 7R incoming ball detection switch 735 that triggers the occurrence of the "7 round big win". In addition, the time from when the game ball enters the type lottery area 408 until it is detected by the 7R ball entry detection switch 735 that triggers the occurrence of the "7 round jackpot" is the game ball enters the type lottery area 408. After that, it is configured to be longer than the time until it is detected by the 15R incoming ball detection switch 734 that triggers the occurrence of the "15th round jackpot".

For this reason, for example, among a plurality of game balls continuously (in quick succession) entering the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414, the preceding game ball is directed to the 3R ball entrance 733 (3R ball detection switch 736). , Even if the subsequent game ball goes to the 15R entrance 731 (15R entrance detection switch 734), the subsequent game ball is first entered into the 15R entrance 731 (15R entrance detection switch 734 detection) to generate a 15-round jackpot that is more advantageous to the player. Therefore, subsequent game balls can be more reliably utilized. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player's feeling that the game balls continuously enter the special pocket part 416a of the rotating body 414, such as loss and waste, and to suppress the decrease in interest caused by it. can be done.

In addition, the type lottery area 408 includes a 3R guide passage 743 that leads the game ball to the 3R entrance 733, a 7R guide passage 745 that leads the game ball to the 7R entrance 732, and a 15R entrance of the game ball. A 15R guide passage 746 leading to the ball mouth 731 is provided. Furthermore, the game ball that has entered the type lottery area 408, the 3R guidance passage 743, or the first bridge plate 744 to distribute to either the other guidance passages 745, 746, and the first bridge plate 744 3R guidance passage 743 A second bridge plate 747 is provided for allocating the game balls not allocated to either the 7R guide passage 745 or the 15R guide passage 746.例文帳に追加That is, the entrance of the 3R guide passage 743 is arranged upstream of the movement path of the game ball in the type lottery area 408 than the entrance of the 7R guide passage 745, but the 3R guide passage 743 is the 7R guide. It is configured so that the time required for the game ball to pass through is longer than the path 745 (in the above example, the movement distance of the game ball is long). Furthermore, the entrance of the 7R guide passage 745 is arranged upstream of the movement path of the game ball in the type lottery area 408 than the entrance of the 15R guide passage 746, but the 7R guide passage 745 is the 15R guide It is configured so that the time required for the game ball to pass through is longer than that of the passage 746 .

Therefore, the game ball that has entered the type lottery area 408 is not guided to the 3R guide passage 743 by the first bridge plate 744 (not dropped by the "sieve" corresponding to the 3R guide passage 743), When the game ball is guided to the second bridge plate 747 and is not guided to the 7R guide passage 745 by the second bridge plate 747 (it is not dropped by the "screen" corresponding to the 7R guide passage 745), the A game ball is guided to a 15R guide passage 746. - 特許庁That is, among the 3R guide passage 743, the 7R ball entrance 732, and the 15R guide passage 746, the more advantageous the player can expect the occurrence of a big win state, the more the entrance is downstream in the type lottery area 408. By being placed on the side (so that the person who remains until the end will have a good result), excitement in the game can be expected. In particular, in the present embodiment, in the type lottery area 408, game balls are sorted in two stages, so that this action and effect are exhibited more remarkably.

In addition, among the 3R guide path 743, 7R guide path 745, and 15R guide path 746, the more advantageous the player can expect the occurrence of a big win state, the more the entrance is a type lottery area. 408 downstream side, for example, when two game balls enter the type lottery area 408 in succession, the preceding game ball is the first transfer plate 744 and the second transfer Even if it is guided to the 15R guide passage 746 side by the plate 747, when the subsequent game ball is guided to the 3R guide passage 743 side by the first bridge plate 744, the subsequent game ball is 3R guided faster. Passage 743 is reached.

In this respect, according to the present embodiment, the 3R guide path 743 requires a longer time for the game ball to pass than the 7R guide path 745, and the 7R guide path 745 takes a longer time for the game ball to pass than the 15R guide path 746. It is configured to increase the time required for passage. For this reason, for example, even though the preceding game ball was guided to the 15R guide path 746 (7R guide path 745), the subsequent game ball 743), and before the preceding game ball enters the 15R guide path 746 (7R guide path 745), the subsequent game ball is 3R guide path 743 or 7R guide path 745 (3R guide path 743) It is possible to more reliably avoid a situation in which a ball enters the ball and a 3-round big win or a 7-round big win (3-round big win) occurs.

In particular, in this embodiment, when two game balls enter the specific area 401 at the same time, for example, the game balls enter the pair of left and right ball entry openings 403 at the same time. are easily guided to the special passage 702, and the possibility that a plurality of game balls enter the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 in succession increases. For this reason, in such a configuration, by adopting the above-described configuration in which a plurality of game balls continuously entering the special pocket portion 416a is not wasted, the special pocket portion 416a (and thus the type lottery area 408) Even if a plurality of game balls enter the game in succession, it is useless, or the effect of suppressing the decline in interest caused by the loss is more effectively achieved.

In addition, a 3R early detection switch 753 for detecting a game ball moving in the 3R guide path 743 and a 7R early detection switch 754 for detecting a game ball moving in the 7R guide path 745 are provided, and the 3R early detection switch 753 or , when the 7R early detection switch 754 is detected, the downstream side of the entering ball count switch 437 in the specific area 401, and the 3R early detection switch 753, the 7R early detection switch 754, and the 15R early detection switch 754 Determination of whether or not a game ball exists in the area upstream of the detection switch 734 (determination of whether or not the value of the incoming ball counter is "0") is performed (see preceding effect processing in FIG. 32). Here, if it is determined that there is no gaming ball in this area, furthermore, in the specific area 401, the area downstream of the 3R early detection switch 753 and upstream of the 3R incoming ball detection switch , and determination of whether or not the number of game balls existing in the area downstream of the 7R early detection switch 754 and upstream of the 7R incoming ball detection switch is one (the value of the ball clogging counter is 1) is performed. Here, when it is determined that there is one, that is, the game ball existing in the specific area 401 is determined to be only one detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 or the 7R early detection switch 754. In the event that the player wins, a preceding opening effect simulating the opening effect that teaches the start of the big win state is derived.

In other words, although it is confirmed that a game ball entering the 3R guide passage 743 or the 7R guide passage 745 will enter the 3R entrance 733 or the 7R entrance 732, is configured so that the passage time of the game ball is longer than that of the 15R guide passage 746, so that the game ball enters the 3R guide passage 743 or 7R guide passage 745 before entering the 3R entrance 733 or 7R entrance It is conceivable that a relatively long time lag occurs until the ball enters the ball at 732 (until it is detected by the 3R ball entry detection switch 736 or the 7R ball entry detection switch 735). In this case, for example, when the game ball enters the special pocket portion 416a single-shot and further enters the 3R guide passage 743 or 7R guide passage 745, the corresponding 3R jackpot or 7R jackpot occurs at this point. In spite of the fact that it is decided (as a player, it is conceivable that the player is somewhat disappointed because it is not a 15R jackpot), it takes a relatively long time for the game ball to pass through the 3R guide passage 743 or the 7R guide passage 745. It is conceivable that it takes a long time and causes a situation in which the jackpot state is not easily started.

In this regard, when the game ball is detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 or the 7R early detection switch 754 installed in the 3R guide passage 743 or 7R guide passage 745, the game ball is detected by the 3R entrance detection switch 736 or There is a possibility that another game ball is detected by the 3R entering detection switch 736, the 7R entering detection switch 735, or the 15R entering detection switch 734 before being detected by the 7R entering detection switch 735. If there is no such condition, since the advance opening effect indicating the occurrence of the 3R jackpot or the 7R jackpot is derived at that time, such concerns can be dispelled. Therefore, it takes too much time (no reaction) to start the big winning state after the type of the big winning state is actually determined to be the 3R big winning or the 7R big winning, and the tempo of the game is slow. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation such as causing a decrease in interest.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when it is determined that only game balls detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 or the 7R early detection switch 754 exist in the specific area 401, the preceding opening effect for the 3-round jackpot, Alternatively, it is configured to derive a preceding opening effect for a 7-round jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a contradiction arises between the mode of the preceding opening performance and the type of the actually occurring big winning state, even though the type of the big winning state can be taught in the preceding opening performance. . By making it possible to teach the type of the jackpot state in the preceding opening effect, the performance can be improved and the player can be given a sense of security.

Further, the jackpot state includes a normal pattern and a shortened pattern in which the opening period is omitted, and when the jackpot state is set, the shortened pattern is selected when the preceding opening performance is derived. It is As a result, it is possible to prevent the opening performance from becoming too long by further performing the opening performance of the normal length when the preceding opening performance is being performed. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably avoid problems such as deterioration of the tempo of the game.

In addition, the value is added based on the detection of the entering ball count switch 437, and the detection of the non-special entering ball detection switch 462, the 3R early detection switch 753, the 7R early detection switch 754, and the 15R entering detection switch 734. A ball counter whose value is subtracted based on the value is added based on the detection of the 3R early detection switch 753 and the 7R early detection switch 754, and the 3R ball detection switch 736 and the 7R ball entrance A clogging counter whose value is decremented based on detection by the detection switch 735 is provided. As a result, it is possible to grasp the number of game balls existing in the specific area 401, and to determine whether or not a ball clog occurs. It is possible to determine whether or not there are game balls other than the game balls detected by the switch 754, or the like. Therefore, it is possible to perform error processing caused by ball jamming, improve the accuracy of the preceding opening effect, increase the amount of information of the preceding opening effect, and improve the game performance and performance. .

Furthermore, when the 3R early detection switch 753 or the 7R early detection switch 754 is detected, it is determined whether or not the value of the incoming ball counter is 0, and if it is determined that it is not 0, it is in a jackpot state. The decorative pattern display device 42 displays a promotion acceptance display indicating that the status is a promotion acceptance state in which the type of is not yet determined. For this reason, for example, when two game balls enter the type lottery area 408 and the preceding game ball enters the 3R guide passage 743, it is still determined that a 3-round big win will occur. Players are made to surely recognize that there is still a possibility that a 7-round big win or a 15-round big win will occur as long as the following game balls do not enter the 3R guide passage 743. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to make the player understand the game more reliably, and when the situation as described above occurs, the subsequent behavior of the game ball and the continuous entry of the game ball into the type lottery area 408 can be confirmed. etc., you can have a stronger interest in them.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the detection of the first incoming ball count switch 437a provided in the first introduction passage 718a and the detection of the second incoming ball count switch 437b provided in the second introduction passage 718b are performed simultaneously. It is configured to derive different effects depending on whether it is performed or performed alone. Therefore, the player can recognize and enjoy the moment when two game balls are guided to the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715 of the route sorting device 703 at the same time.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is arranged so as to cover the front of the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745 (a semi-transparent ) A covering cover 756 (see FIG. 4) is provided as covering means. As a result, before and after the game ball enters the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745, the visibility of the game ball changes. Therefore, the entrances of the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745 can be regarded as the entrances of the 3R entrance 731 and the 7R entrance 732 . Therefore, basically, if a ball enters the entrance of the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745, a "3R jackpot" or "7R jackpot" will occur. can do. In addition, by visually recognizing the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745, which are shaped to delay the game ball, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the design and the complicated appearance of the type lottery area 408. can be done.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above-described embodiment, and may be implemented as follows, for example.

(a) In the above-described embodiment, the configuration of the route sorting device 703 that sorts the game ball entering the specific area 401 to the normal passage 701 (normal guide section 704) or the special passage 702 (special guide section 705) is particularly It is not limited and can be changed as appropriate. For example, in the above embodiment, the reference posture of the route sorting device 703 is a posture capable of guiding the game ball to the special passage 702, and by maintaining the reference posture when guiding the game ball, the game ball is guided to the special path 702, the standard posture of the route sorting device 703 is a posture that can guide the game ball to the normal path 701, and guides the game ball (contacts the game ball). ), the game ball may be guided to the special passage 702 by changing to a posture in which the game ball can be guided to the special passage 702 . Next, a mode example of the route sorting device will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44. FIG.

(a-1) The route sorting device 901 shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 includes a base plate 902 attached to the front side of the game board 30 and a sorting plate 903 provided rotatably with respect to the base plate 902. I have. The distribution plate 903 includes a substantially cylindrical bearing portion 904 extending in the left-right direction, a plate-shaped front piece portion 905 projecting forward from the bearing portion 904, and a plate-shaped rear piece portion 906 projecting rearward from the bearing portion 904. and A cylindrical shaft pin 907 is inserted through the bearing portion 904 , and both ends of the shaft pin 907 are attached to the base plate 902 . Thus, the distribution plate 903 is rotatably attached to the base plate 902 .

As shown in FIG. 44, in this embodiment, the shaft pin 907 and the bearing portion 904 extend horizontally, while the upper surface of the distribution plate 903 (the front piece portion 905) is inclined slightly downward toward the left. and extended. Further, as shown in FIG. 43 , a weight portion 911 is provided on the rear piece portion 906 of the distribution plate 903 . Also, the rear part is heavier. The weight portion 911 may be integrally formed with the rear piece portion 906 , or the weight portion 911 as a separate member may be attached to the rear piece portion 906 .

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 43, a lower stopper 912 is provided for contacting and supporting the lower surface of the distribution plate 903 which is in a posture that is not tilted in the front-rear direction. In a state in which no external force such as a game ball comes into contact with the distribution plate 903, the distribution plate 903 is maintained in a posture that is not tilted in the front-rear direction (hereinafter referred to as a “reference posture”). It has become.

Also, as shown in FIG. 44, on the upper right side of the distribution plate 903 (front piece 905), there is a game where a ball entered from each ball entry opening 403 to the central winning unit 37 (route distribution region 406 of the specific region 401) is displayed. An outlet 921 of the lead-in passage 718 is formed to guide the ball. In addition, in this embodiment, the first introduction passage 718 a and the second introduction passage 718 b merge to form a common outlet 921 .

Furthermore, at the position directly below the outlet 921 of the introduction passage 718, the game ball discharged from the introduction passage 718 is received and guided to the upper right end (most upstream portion) of the distribution plate 903 (front piece 905). A backing plate 922 is provided.

In addition, on the left side of the distribution plate 903 (front piece portion 905), a normal guide portion 704 for guiding the game ball to the normal passage 701 is provided, and below the distribution plate 903 (front piece portion 905), a game A special guide 705 is provided to guide the ball to the special passage 702 . Ordinarily, the distribution plate 903 is in the standard posture, and the special guide portion 705 is closed by the distribution plate 903 .

Then, when the game ball enters the central winning unit 37 (the route distribution area 406 of the specific area 401), the game ball passes through the introduction passage 718, passes through the receiving plate 922, and passes in front of the distribution plate 903. It is guided to the upper right portion of the piece 905 . In this embodiment, the weight obtained by adding the weight of the front piece portion 905 of the distribution plate 903 and the weight of one game ball is the weight of the rear piece portion 906 of the distribution plate 903 and the weight of the weight portion 911. It is configured to be lighter than the weight added.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 44(a), even if one game ball is placed on the upper surface of the front piece 905, the distribution plate 903 is maintained in the reference posture, and the game ball is placed on the front piece 905. , the vehicle is guided to the normal guide portion 704 .

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44(b), when two or more game balls are placed on the upper surface of the front piece portion 905, the distribution plate 903 moves forward from the standard posture. It is configured to be rotationally displaced to a downwardly inclined rotational posture. That is, in this embodiment, the weight obtained by adding the weight of the front piece portion 905 of the distribution plate 903 and the weight of two game balls is the weight of the rear piece portion 906 of the distribution plate 903 and the weight portion 911. is configured to be heavier than the weight of

Also, as indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 43, when the distribution plate 903 is displaced to the rotational posture, the special guide portion 705 is opened. Therefore, when two or more game balls are placed on the upper surface of the front piece portion 905, the game balls placed on the upper surface of the front piece portion 905 are guided to the special guide portion 705. It's becoming

As shown in FIG. 43, the route sorting device 901 has an upper stopper 913 on the rear surface side of the base plate 902 that abuts and supports the upper surface of the rear piece portion 906 of the sorting plate 903 displaced to the rotational posture. I have it. The distribution plate 903 in contact with the upper stopper 913 is maintained in a posture in which the upper surface of the distribution plate 903 is downwardly inclined forward. As a result, after the game ball placed on the upper surface of the front piece 905 moves to the special guide portion 705, the distribution plate 903 is configured to rotate and displace to the reference position due to the balance of its own weight. .

As described above, even in this mode example, when game balls enter the central winning unit 37 (the route sorting area 406 of the specific area 401) almost at the same time or in quick succession, these plurality of game balls are By providing a route sorting device 703 that guides both of them to the special guide part 705, a plurality of game balls are collectively entered into the specific area 401, and the expectation of entering the special pocket part 416a is increased. can be matched. Therefore, it is possible to derive the behavior of the game ball that meets the player's expectation that the degree of expectation for a big win is improved by entering a plurality of game balls into the specific area 401 at once.

(a-2) In the embodiment of (a-1) described above, when the number of game balls placed on the front piece 905 of the distribution plate 903 is reduced from a plurality to one, the distribution plate 903 moves from the rotational posture to the reference position. There is concern that game balls may get caught between the front piece 905 of the distribution plate 903 and the glass unit 137 when trying to return to the posture, but a configuration may be added to prevent this. For example, in front of the front piece portion 905 of the distribution plate 903 in the reference posture, it extends from a position below the front piece portion 905 to a position above the front piece portion 905, and has approximately the same width as the front piece portion 905. Alternatively, a relatively lightweight and transparent front cover may be provided, the upper portion of which is rotatably supported. In this case, even if a game ball is sandwiched between the front cover and the front piece 905 of the distribution plate 903 returning from the rotating posture to the reference posture, the front cover is rotated and displaced accordingly. Therefore, the displacement of the distribution plate 903 is allowed.

It should be noted that the angle of the distribution plate 903, which assumes a rotational posture by simply shortening the front and rear width of the front piece 905 or placing a plurality of game balls on the front piece 905, is changed by the momentum of rotation. etc.), the game ball placed on the front piece portion 905 is configured to be larger than the angle at which the game ball falls to the special guide portion 705, so that the front piece portion 905 of the distribution plate 903 and the glass unit 137 You may suppress that a game ball is caught between. Further, in the above-described embodiment and the like, when the blade member 404 is opened, only one game ball enters the specific area 401 (entering ball opening 403), and only one game ball enters the route sorting device 703. Even if guided, the game ball may be guided to the special guide section 705 with a possibility (although very low).

(b) Distributing means (in the above embodiment, , rotator unit 410), and the game ball after being detected by the special ball detection switch 461 is guided to either the 15R ball entrance 731, the 7R ball entrance 732, or the 3R ball entrance 733. The configuration of the classification sorting device 741 is not particularly limited, and can be designed as appropriate.

For example, in the rotating body unit 410 of the above embodiment, a game ball that reaches the front (gate portion 435) of the rotating body 414 via the left safe passage 427 and the rotating body 414 via the right safe passage 427 However, for example, a structure is provided in which they are guided to the rotating body 414 in order (for example, the left route is directly connected to the rotating body 414 , and the right route finally passes through the left route before being guided forward of the rotating body 414. The game ball passing through the right route enters the left route. A device that weakens the momentum at the entrance to the left route so that the left route does not flow back significantly (for example, a freely opening and closing valve that can be opened by the weight of the game ball). good.

Further, for example, regarding the type sorting device 741, a sloping plate (the front side portion is slanted to the right front) that is adjacent to the right side of the start table 742 and extends toward the right with a slight downward slope; An entrance to the 3R guide passage 743 is arranged in front of the inclined plate on the upstream side, and an entrance to the 7R guide passage 745 is arranged in front of the inclined plate on the downstream side. The entrance to the 15R guide passage 746 may be arranged to the right of the .

It should be noted that the probability and ratio of the game ball entering the success/fail lottery area 407 entering the safe passage 427 (detected by the special ball entry detection switch 461) is appropriately set for each pachinko machine model. . For example, the number of special pocket portions 416a and non-special pocket portions 416b of the rotating body 414 of the rotating body unit 410 may be increased to eight in total, or the number of special pocket portions 416a and non-special pocket portions 416b For example, by changing the ratio of 2 to 6, 3 to 5, etc., the probability that the game ball that reaches the rotating body unit 410 enters the special pocket portion 416a may be changed.

Further, the sorting means may be one that reciprocates instead of rotating, and the direction and pattern of operation are not particularly limited. Furthermore, the sorting means may not operate, for example, the special pocket portion 416a and the non-special pocket portion 416b may be fixedly provided, and furthermore, the game player may be provided on the upstream side thereof. It is also possible to provide a configuration that randomizes the behavior of a game ball such as a nail.

(c) In the above embodiment, among the 3R guide path 743, 7R guide path 745, and 15R guide path 746 of the type lottery area 408, the entrance of the path that can be expected to generate a big win state that is more advantageous for the player. As long as it is arranged downstream of the movement path of the game ball in the type lottery area 408, the time until the game ball entering the type lottery area 408 is detected by the 3R entering ball detection switch 736 Also, the time until the game ball that entered the type lottery area 408 is detected by the 7R ball detection switch 735 is shorter, and the game ball that has entered the type lottery area 408 is detected by the 7R ball detection switch 735. The time until the game ball entering the type lottery area 408 is detected by the 15R entering ball detection switch 734 may be shorter than the time until the game ball is detected. For example, the entrance of a passage that can be expected to generate a more advantageous big win state for the player may be arranged on the upstream side in the type lottery area 408 . However, it is possible to improve the game performance and the like by delaying the timing of the awarding of the big winning state more advantageous to the player as much as possible. In particular, as in the above-described embodiment, when adopting a configuration in which the moving paths of the game balls in the type lottery area 408 are divided into multiple stages, such a function and effect are made more remarkable.

(d) In addition, the 7R guide path 745 is configured so that the movement distance of the game ball is longer than that of the 15R guide path 746, and the 3R guide path 743 is configured so that the movement distance of the game ball is longer than that of the 7R guide path 745. However, basically, the 7R guide path 745 is configured to take a longer time for the game ball to pass than the 15R guide path 746, and the 3R guide path 743 allows the game ball to pass more than the 7R guide path 745. It suffices if the configuration is such that the time required for the process is long. For example, change the inclination of the 3R guide path 743, 7R guide path 745, 15R guide path 746, or delay means such that the game ball goes back and forth in the same place several times, or moves forward after circling, or a game A delay means may be installed in the 3R guide passage 743 or the like to temporarily stop the momentum of the ball and take a relatively long time to guide the ball to the next location. Incidentally, such delay means may be installed in both the 3R guide path 743 and the 7R guide path 745, but in that case, the time required for the game ball to pass through the 7R guide path 745 is Install something that does not take longer than the time required to pass.

Of the game balls entering the two special pocket portions 416a of the rotating body 414, the game balls that entered the type lottery area 408 earlier than the 3R entering ball detection switch 736 are detected. is configured to be detected by the 7R entering ball detection switch 735, and earlier than the preceding game ball is detected by the 7R entering ball detection switch 735, the subsequent game ball is detected by the 15R entering ball detection switch configured to be detected by G.734. It is also possible to omit the 15R guide passage 746 (configure so that the game ball jumps directly from the second bridge plate 747 into the 15R entrance 731).

(e) In the above embodiment, the number and contents of types of jackpots are not particularly limited, and are appropriately set for each model of pachinko machine. Also, the number and contents of game modes such as normal mode and time reduction mode are not particularly limited. For example, in the above-described embodiment, in the time reduction mode, the variation time of the special display devices 43a and 43b is shortened, and the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 that teaches the result of the ball assist lottery is shortened, and , the opening time of the second variable prize winning device 33b is lengthened, but instead of or in addition to this, the probability of winning a small prize in the success or failure lottery is increased, or the ball-entering assist lottery is won. It may be configured to increase the probability. Further, for example, as a game mode, the opening and closing member 33c of the second starting prize winning device 33b is not only in a "high ball winning state" in which the opening and closing member 33c is opened relatively frequently, but also the first starting prize winning device 33a and the second starting prize winning device A variable probability mode may be set in which the probability of winning a big hit or a small hit is increased in the winning lottery based on the ball entering 33b, or although it is not in a high ball entry state, winning a big hit or a small win in the winning lottery. You may set the latent certainty mode in which the probability of doing so is increased. It should be noted that the winning lottery may be constructed so as not to win the jackpot.

(f) In the above embodiment, both the route sorting device 703 and the type sorting device 741 are provided in the specific area 401, but either one of them may be omitted. In the above-described embodiment, the central winning unit 37 determines whether or not to grant a big win state, and also determines the type of the big win state, depending on the behavior of the game ball that has entered (the destination of the ball). However, it is not particularly limited to such a configuration.

(f-1) For example, in the above embodiment, the game ball detected by the special ball entry detection switch 461 enters any of the 15R ball entrance 731, the 7R ball entrance 732, and the 3R ball entrance 733. The type of jackpot is determined analogously depending on whether the type sorting device 741 is omitted, and when the special ball detection switch 461 is detected, the value of the corresponding random number counter is acquired and acquired. The type of jackpot may be determined by a lottery to determine which type of jackpot the value of the random number counter corresponds to. Furthermore, for example, when a small win is won in a winning lottery performed based on the entry of game balls into the starting prize winning devices 33a and 33b, the central winning unit 37 is opened in response to the small win. It also determines the jackpot type given when the game ball enters the game ball and enters the special pocket part 416a and the safe passage 427 (detected by the special ball entry detection switch 461). It may be configured as Even when adopting these configurations, a route sorting device 703 is provided to guide all of the plurality of game balls into the special passage 702 when all of the plurality of game balls entering the specific area 401 are sorted at the same time. As a result, in the event that game balls enter the specific area 401 almost at the same time, which is relatively rare, and if a phenomenon occurs that makes it easier for a jackpot state to occur, substantially, You can increase your chances of winning.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the route sorting device 703 provides a jackpot state when a game ball enters the safe passage 427 where a specified number of prize balls are given, and the game ball enters the safe passage 427. By doing so, it is configured to guide the game balls to either the out passage 428 where the specified number of prize balls are awarded but the jackpot state is not awarded (becomes out), but it is limited to such a configuration. not something. For example, in a configuration in which the type sorting device 741 is omitted, a winning lottery to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state by entering a game ball (detection of a game ball is performed) and a type lottery to determine the type of the jackpot state A first start ball entry means (first start ball entry detection means) as a first ball entry means in which is performed, and whether a jackpot state is generated by entering a game ball (detection of a game ball is performed) a second start ball entry means (second start ball entry detection means) serving as a second ball entry means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not the ball is successful and a type lottery to determine the type of the jackpot state; Rather than sorting the type of the jackpot state that can be awarded when the jackpot state is won in the winning lottery performed based on the game ball's entry into the second start ball entry means In the configuration in which it is more advantageous for the advantageous player to distribute the type of the jackpot state that can be awarded when the jackpot state is won in the winning lottery performed based on the route distribution device 703, the first start ball entry means Or guide the game ball to either the second starting ball entry means (in the case of 1 ball, guide it to the first start ball entry means, and in the case of 2 balls (multiple balls in the above aspect example (a-1)) guides to the second starting ball entry means).

Furthermore, for example, a first ball entry means (first ball entry detection means) that gives m game balls when a game ball enters (a game ball is detected), and a game ball enters A second ball entry means (second ball entry detection means) that gives n game balls, which is more than m, by doing (detection of game balls), and the route sorting device 703 Guide the game ball to either the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means (in the case of one ball, guide it to the first ball entry means, and guide the game ball to the first ball entry means, and guide the game ball to the first ball entry means, and guide the game ball to the first ball entry means, and guide the game ball to the first ball entry means, and guide the game ball to either the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means). In some cases, it may be configured to guide to the second ball entering means).

(f-2) Also, for example, a route such that the possibility of being guided to the special passage 702 is (quite) low unless a plurality of game balls enter the specific area 401 almost simultaneously as in the above embodiment. A route sorting device that omits the sorting device 703 and, instead, has the possibility of guiding the game balls to the special passage 702 even when the game balls enter the specific area 401 one by one. (It may or may not be movable) may be provided. In addition, for example, the special passage 702 may be omitted (the movement path of the game ball may be configured so that there is no advantage or disadvantage in entering the safe passage 427), or the game ball entering the specific area 401 may rotate. The movement route up to the body 414 may be configured to be a single road, and the route sorting device 703 may be omitted.

(f-3) Further, for example, when the central prize winning unit 37 is configured as a second variable prize winning device and a jackpot win is won in a winning lottery based on the ball entering the starting prize winning device 33a, 33b, the jackpot state is established. The blade member 404 may be configured to open after a predetermined number of rounds. In this case, the central winning unit 37 has the role of determining the game mode to be provided after the end of the big win state, specifically, for example, the role of giving either the time reduction mode or the variable probability mode after the end of the big win state. Given, (1: Omit the type lottery area 408 in the above embodiment, determine whether to give the variable probability mode in the rotating body unit 410 (Enter the specific pocket portion 416 and the special ball detection switch 461 It may be configured so that the variable probability mode is provided by detection, and the detection of the non-special entry detection switch 462 may be performed before that), or The route sorting area 406 is omitted, and the type sorting device 741 determines whether or not to give the variable probability mode (in the above embodiment, the switch configured as the 15R entry detection switch 734 detects the variable probability mode It may be configured such that it is disabled if other switches 745 and 746 that are set so that the time reduction mode is applied by being detected prior to that are detected.

Furthermore, the first starting winning device 33a without the opening and closing member 33c is arranged in the lower or left game area of the central winning unit 37, and the second starting winning device 33b having the opening and closing member 33c is placed in the central winning unit 37. It is arranged in the right game area (right game area), the through gate 34 is arranged only in the right game area, and in the normal mode, the probability of winning the ball-entering assist lottery is low, and the opening/closing member 33c is opened. If not, it may be configured such that the ball cannot be entered into the second starting prize winning device 33b.

It should be noted that the jackpot state provided when winning the winning lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second start prize winning device 33b is the same as the entry of the game ball into the first start prize winning device 33a. A jackpot state that is advantageous to the player, or a possibility of selecting an advantageous jackpot state, is higher than the jackpot state that is granted when winning in a win-or-fail lottery conducted based on the above. may For example, when a jackpot is won in a winning lottery based on the ball entering the first starting prize winning device 33a, the condition for ending the predetermined jackpot round in the jackpot state is that the central prize winning unit 37 is opened twice for 1 second. Alternatively, if the upper limit is set to 8 balls, and the jackpot is won in the lottery based on the ball entering the second start prize winning device 33b, the condition for ending the predetermined jackpot round in the jackpot state is The central prize-winning unit 37 may be configured to be opened once for 30 seconds, or to be set with an upper limit of 8 incoming balls. In this case, in a predetermined jackpot round in the jackpot state based on the balls entering the second starting prize winning device 33b, the number of game balls entering the central prize winning unit 37 increases, so that the number of game balls entering the second starting prize winning device 33b increases. Ball-based jackpot conditions are more advantageous.

(g) In the above embodiment, the pair of left and right blade members 404 operate in synchronism. Although the other is configured to be in the closed position, either one may be configured to operate independently. In other words, when a small prize is won in the lottery, both of the pair of left and right blade members 404 are open in a pattern in which only the left side is in the open position and in a pattern in which only the right side is in the open position. It may be configured so that there is a pattern that Furthermore, as a pattern in which both are in the open position, a pattern in which both are opened and closed at the same timing, a pattern in which the left side is early, and a pattern in which the right side is early may be set. In addition, which of the blade members 404 is to be opened may be taught by a liquid crystal display, voice, lighting of a light emitting means, or the like (there may be a state of teaching and a state of not teaching). .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the specific region 401 is changed by the blade member 404 between a state in which the ball can enter the specific region 401 and a state in which the ball cannot be entered. There is always a possibility of a ball entering the specific area 401, such as by providing an opening that allows the ball to enter the specific area 401, in addition to the ball entering opening 403 that is opened and closed by the blade member 404. It may be configured as

(h) Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the first ball entering opening 403a on the left side of the pair of left and right ball entering openings 403 in the central winning unit 37 is guided to the route sorting device 703. The introduction passage 718a and the length of the second introduction passage 718b that guides the game ball entering the second ball entry opening 403b on the right side to the route sorting device 703 are configured to have the same length, but they are different. It may be configured as In addition, one or both of the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b may be provided with a movable passage that lengthens the introduction passages 718a and 718b (or changes the moving speed of the game ball). . When adopting these configurations, even if the game ball does not enter the first ball entry opening 403a and the second ball entry opening 403b at the same time, the first wing portion 714 and the second There is a possibility that two game balls will fall on the wings 715 at the same time.

In the above-described embodiment, the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b are folded back and forth, making it difficult to visually recognize the game ball moving through the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b. At least the portion near the exit may be configured to extend in the left-right direction and be visible from the front (separated by a transparent front panel or open to the front).

Further, the route sorting device 703 of the above-described embodiment may be employed, and the first introduction passage 718a and the second introduction passage 718b may be configured to merge, as in the above example (a-1). Furthermore, when adopting such a configuration, the game balls are configured to be able to fall simultaneously on the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715 of the route sorting device 703 (the width of the exit of the introduction passage after merging is wide, etc.). In addition, in the vicinity of the exit of the lead-in passage after merging, the movement of the game ball may be slowed down, or the game ball may roll left and right and then drop so that the player can easily recognize the game ball. . When adopting such a configuration, when a plurality of game balls enter one of the first ball entry opening 403a or the second ball entry opening 403b in rapid succession, such a plurality of There is a possibility that game balls fall simultaneously on the first wing portion 714 and the second wing portion 715 of the route sorting device 703 . Therefore, even if the game ball enters the specific area 401 from both the first ball entry opening 403a and the second ball entry opening 403b and does not aim at the launch position of the game ball, it is possible to enter either one. Since it is only necessary to aim at the shooting position of the game ball so that it is easy to hit the ball, the operability and game characteristics are simplified (for example, a game that does not know the game characteristics such as having to enter both balls at the same time) Even a person can do it without loss). Note that the ball entry opening 403 may be provided at one location.

Furthermore, a stopping means is provided in the introduction passage 718, and, for example, a game ball entering the specific area 404 (entering ball opening 403) is temporarily stopped by the stopping means while the left and right blade members 404 are opened once. After being instructed, it may be configured to be guided to the route sorting device 703 all at once. In this case, even if the timing of entering the specific area 404 (entering ball opening 403) is slightly different, if the game ball can enter the specific area 404 between the time when the blade member 404 opens and closes. , the timing of dropping to the route sorting device 703 can be matched.

It should be noted that the stopping means may be configured to switch between an open state in which movement to the route sorting device 703 is permitted and a closed state in which movement to the route sorting device 703 is restricted in a certain period of time. While displacing between the open position where movement to the device 703 is permitted and the closed position where movement is restricted, the operation of the stopping means is relatively slow, and the stopping means switches from the closed position to the open position. Alternatively, the game ball entered into the specific area 404 (entering ball opening 403) while the blade member 404 is open may be stopped by the stopping means.

(i) In the above embodiment, only when the value of the entering ball counter is 0 and the value of the clogged ball counter is 1 in the preceding effect processing, the setting processing of the 3R preceding opening command or the 7R preceding opening command is performed. Although it is configured to perform an opening command setting process, it may be configured to perform an opening command setting process regardless of the value of the clogged ball counter if the value of the incoming ball counter is 0. However, if the value of the clogged ball counter is other than 0, the opening command setting process may be performed (if the value is 0, for example, error processing may be performed).

That is, when the value of the ball clogging counter is 2 or more, the game ball detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 or 7R early detection switch 754 precedes the game ball detected by the 3R guide passage 743 or 7R guide passage. 745 already exists. In the above-described embodiment, if there is a preceding game ball, the big win state will start without waiting so long, so a configuration is adopted in which derivation of the preceding opening effect is refrained. Also, by adopting such a configuration, for example, the detection of the 7R early detection switch 754 was confirmed, but at that time there was already a game ball moving in the 3R guide passage 743 (near the exit). Therefore, even if the preceding opening performance for the 7-round big win is performed based on the detection of the 7R early detection switch 754, the situation such as actually giving the 3-round big win instead of the 7-round big win is avoided. can do.

However, if the configuration is such that the passage time of the game ball through the 3R guide path 743 or 7R guide path 745 is longer, after the value of the ball entry counter becomes 0, the reaction regarding the occurrence of the big win is derived. There is a possibility that the time lag until is too long. In such a case, such concern can be suppressed by deriving the advance opening effect even if the value of the clogged ball counter is not 1, as described above.

Furthermore, even when such a configuration is adopted, since the value of the incoming ball counter is 0, there is no possibility that the subsequent game ball will cause a more advantageous jackpot state. Although the effect is derived, before the game ball detected by the 3R early detection switch 753 is detected by the 3R entering ball detection switch 736, another game ball is detected by the 15R entering ball detection switch 734, and 15 It is possible to avoid situations such as occurrence of a round jackpot state.

In addition, after step S7705 in FIG. 32, a process of turning on the 3R passing flag indicating that the game ball is passing through the 3R guide passage 743 is added, and after step S7711, the game ball passes through the 7R guide passage 745. A process is added to turn on the 7R passing flag indicating that the vehicle is passing. Further, in step S7703, instead of the process of determining the value of the clogged ball counter, it is determined whether or not the 7R passage flag is turned on, and if the determination is affirmative, the game during passage through the 7R guidance passage 745 is determined. Since the ball will be detected by the 7R entry detection switch 735 first, set the preceding opening command for the 7 rounds jackpot (if it is determined to be negative, the preceding opening command for the 3rd round jackpot) set). Also, in step S7709, instead of the process of determining the value of the clogged ball counter, it is determined whether or not the 3R passing flag is turned on. It may be configured to set a shared preceding opening command or not to set a preceding opening command (if a negative determination is made, a preceding opening command for a 7-round jackpot is set). Also, for example, the preceding opening effect may be shared (in the same manner) for the 7-round jackpot and the 3-round jackpot. When adopting these configurations, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a contradiction between the aspect of the preceding opening effect and the actual jackpot type. It should be noted that the 3R passing flag and the 7R passing flag are turned off at the start or end of the jackpot state.

(j) In the remaining ball monitoring process of the above embodiment, an error notification process and a clogged ball counter are performed when the value of the monitoring timer becomes 0 in a state where the value of the incoming ball counter is determined to be other than 0. The mode (content) of the error notification may be different from the error notification process performed when the value of the watchdog timer becomes 0 in a state where the value of is determined to be other than 0. That is, by the incoming ball counter, the route sorting area 406, the winning lottery area 407, and the type lottery area 408, the 3R early detection switch 753, the 7R early detection switch 754, and the 15R incoming ball detection switch 734 are upstream. It can be grasped that game balls are clogged in the area. Furthermore, by the ball clogging counter, the area downstream of the 3R early detection switch 753 in the type lottery area 408 and the upstream side of the 3R incoming ball detection switch 736, or the downstream side of the 7R early detection switch 754, In addition, it can be grasped that game balls are clogged in the area upstream of the 7R entrance detection switch 735, that is, in the 3R guide passage 743 or the 7R guide passage 745. Therefore, by using different error notifications, it is possible to more specifically indicate where in the specific area 401 the ball clogging has occurred.

(k) In the above embodiment, when the preceding opening effect is performed, the opening effect is shortened and the jackpot condition is performed, but the opening effect is omitted and the big win condition is performed You may

(l) In the above embodiment, a detection switch is installed in the special guide section 705 or the special passage 702, and when a game ball is detected, a sound effect for teaching that the game ball is passing through the special route, It may be configured to generate a lamp lighting effect or the like.

(m) In the above embodiment, the translucent covering cover 756 that covers the front of the 3R guide passage 743 and the 7R guide passage 745 is provided, but the design of the covering cover 756 can be changed as appropriate, It is also possible to omit the covering cover 756 . Further, for example, LEDs are provided for irradiating light toward the back surface of the 3R seal 757a, 7R seal 757b, or 15R seal 757c, respectively, and the 3R early detection switch 753, 7R early detection switch 754, or 15R incoming ball detection switch is provided. 734 may be configured to turn on the corresponding LED. Furthermore, it may be configured to blink when the promotion is being accepted.

(n) In the above embodiment, no matter which one of the first start-up prize-winning device 33a and the second start-up prize-winning device 33b the game ball enters, the winning probability of the winning lottery, the variable display time, etc. are the same. When the game ball enters the first starting prize winning device 33a and when the ball enters the second starting prize winning device 33b, the distribution of big hits and small hits in the winning lottery, and the case of winning in each lottery You may comprise so that the content of a privilege, etc. may differ. For example, a first special display device that performs a variable display for teaching the result of the winning lottery performed based on the ball entering the first start prize winning device 33a, and based on the ball entering the second start prize winning device 33b A second special display device is provided for performing a variable display for teaching the result of the winning lottery to be performed, and when a small winning lottery is won in the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first start winning device 33a. , the blade member 404 is opened only once for 1 second at a rate of 9/10, and the blade member 404 is opened twice for 1 second at a rate of 1/10, and the ball enters the second start winning device 33b. When a small hit is won in the winning lottery based on, the blade member 404 is opened only once for 1 second at a rate of 1/10, and the blade member 404 is opened 2 times for 1 second at a rate of 9/10. It may be configured to be opened twice.

(o) In addition, in the above embodiment, it is possible to hold up to a total of four variable displays on the special display device 43 for teaching the result of the winning lottery based on the ball entering the first start-up prize-winning device 33a and the second start-up prize-winning device 33b. However, the number of reservations is not particularly limited. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which up to four (total of eight) variable displays can be reserved in correspondence with each of the first start-up prize-winning device 33a and the second start-up prize-winning device 33b. When adopting such a configuration, it may be configured such that the number of suspensions of the variable display based on the ball entering each of the starting prize-winning devices 33a and 33b can be grasped separately. Further, when adopting this configuration, for example, the variable display based on the ball entering the second starting prize winning device 33b is given priority over the variable display based on the ball entering the first starting prize winning device 33a. Alternatively, the variable display corresponding to the order in which the first start-up prize winning device 33a and the second start-up prize winning device 33b were hit may be executed.

It should be noted that the variable display of the win/fail lottery may not be suspended. In addition, the number of holdings of the variable display for teaching the result of the entry assist lottery is not particularly limited, and it may be configured to be able to hold less than 4 or 5 or more, or the entry assist lottery. A configuration may be adopted in which the variable display is not suspended.

(p) Furthermore, in the above embodiment, two starting ball entry means (first starting winning device 33a and second starting winning device 33b) are provided, but one may be provided, or three or more may be provided. . Also, the arrangement of the starting ball entry means is not particularly limited. In the above-described embodiment, there is a case where a "jackpot" (direct hit jackpot) is won in the lottery performed based on the ball entering the starting prize winning devices 33a, 33b. In the lottery based on the above, it may be configured so that the "big win" is not decided (so that the lottery is sorted into "small win" or "loss"). Further, it may be configured such that the blade member 404 is always opened when a ball enters the starting prize-winning devices 33a and 33b (so that a "small win" is always made and there is no loss). Further, in the above embodiment, the blade member 404 may be opened a plurality of times (for example, twice) for one "small win".

(q) It may be implemented as a pachinko machine of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, while omitting the variable winning device 32 (large winning opening), based on the ball entering the special winning opening 442 and the non-special winning opening 443 (detection of the special winning ball detection switch 461 and the non-special winning ball detection switch 462) Assuming that a predetermined number of game balls are paid out, until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the blade member 404 of the central winning unit 37 is opened, or a predetermined number (for example, 8) It may be applied to a gaming machine in which a game state is set to a jackpot state while a predetermined round (for example, 3, 8, or 16 rounds) is repeated as one round until a game ball enters the ball. In this case, the central winning unit 37 also functions as the variable winning device 32 . Also, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as an arrangement ball machine, various game machines such as a jagger ball similar thereto.

(r) Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with vibration detection means for detecting the vibration of the pachinko machine 10, and the pachinko machine 10 is shaken (struck) when the power is turned on. ), etc., the vibration is detected by the vibration detection means, and when the detection is performed, error processing (error notification in the pachinko machine 10, temporary suspension of the game (normal processing, etc.), external such as a hall computer error information output) is performed.

In addition, when the game ball enters the type lottery area 408 such as when the special ball detection switch 461 (type entry detection means) is detected, the decorative symbol display device 42 (display means) , "Please do not shake the table. If vibration is detected, the jackpot may be invalidated." It is desirable that such guidance is completed between the time the game ball is detected by the special entrance ball detection switch 461 and the time it enters the type lottery area 408). In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from shaking the pachinko machine 10 (involuntarily or intentionally) due to being too enthusiastic about the game, and the swinging of the pachinko machine 10 also controls the behavior of the game balls. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a change occurs in Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from vibrating, which is undesirable for both the player and the game hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed.

Furthermore, the vibration detection level by the vibration detection means is set in a plurality of stages, and when a game ball enters the type lottery area 408 such as when the special ball detection switch 461 is detected, vibration It may be configured so that the detection level is raised (even smaller vibrations can be detected). In addition, error processing is not performed with one vibration detection, but after displaying a warning once, when vibration detection is performed next (for example, while a warning is being displayed), an error It may be configured so that processing is performed.

(s) In the above embodiment, instead of determining the occurrence of the jackpot state based on the detection of the special entry detection switch 461 (for example, the special entry detection switch 46 may be omitted, or the special entry detection switch 46 may be It is configured to determine the occurrence of various jackpot states based on the detection of the 15R ball entry detection switch 734, 7R ball entry detection switch 735, and 3R ball entry detection switch 736. may

In addition, the central prize winning unit 37 is provided separately from the special ball entry detection switch 461, and a type entry detection switch (type entry detection means) for detecting a game ball (immediately before) led out to the type lottery area 408, A back passage counter that counts up based on detection of the special entrance detection switch 461 and counts down based on detection of the type entry detection switch, and a back passage counter provided near the entrance to the type lottery area 408, the value of the back passage counter It is also possible to provide (in this example, two) type entry standby lamps that are controlled to light up correspondingly. In this case, the number of game balls entering the type lottery area 408 can be easily grasped.

Although not specifically mentioned in the above embodiment, the passage (back passage) from the rotator 414 (safe passage 427) to the type lottery area 408 (start table 742) can be visually recognized by the player in front. It may be configured. Also, in the back passage, the game balls may flow down one by one so that the order of the game balls is not changed. In addition, in the back passage or the like, interval adjusting means for adjusting intervals between game balls continuously entering the type lottery area 408 (a shutter that opens and closes at a predetermined interval, rotates at a constant interval, and moves game balls one by one to the downstream side) It is also possible to provide a guideable wind body, etc.). In this case, it is possible to suppress variation in the behavior of the game balls continuously entering the type lottery area 408 .

(t) In the above embodiment, the special entry detection switch 461, the non-special entry detection switch 462, the entry count switch 437, the 15R entry detection switch 734, the 7R entry detection switch 7345, the 3R entry detection switch 736, A detection history storage means capable of accumulating and storing detection information (detection history) of the 3R early detection switch 753 and the 7R early detection switch 754 is provided, and the storage contents of the detection history storage means can be derived to the decorative pattern display device 42 etc. may be configured. Further, the detection information may be configured to be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (such as a hall computer) each time it is detected or at predetermined intervals. In this case, since the behavior history of the game ball in the specific area 401 is clearly left, it is possible to avoid the trouble between the player and the game hall as to where the game ball entered and to avoid complication. can be done.

In particular, when the time of the real-time clock provided in the pachinko machine 10 for grasping the current time and the detection history are stored in association with each other, such a function and effect are exhibited more remarkably. The detection history stored in the detection history storage means may be erased in a predetermined period (one day, one week, etc.), or may be erased by a RAM clear operation. Good (power on or off is not desired). Further, the values of the entering ball counter and the ball jamming counter may be configured to be able to be derived to the decorative pattern display device 42 and the pachinko machine 10 outside.

(u) The central winning unit 37 may be provided with stopping means capable of stopping the game ball moving in the specific area 401 . Here, an example of a mode for embodying the stopping means in the type sorting device 741 will be described with reference to FIG. 45 . In the above-described embodiment, the upper limit of game balls continuously entering the type lottery area 408 is substantially two balls. It is assumed that the area 408 is configured to allow a ball to be entered (for example, the rotating body 414 has four or more pocket portions 416 and three or more special pocket portions 416a).

As shown in FIGS. 45(a) and 45(b), the type sorting device 741 is provided adjacent to the downstream (right) edge of the start table 742, and like the start table 742, is inclined slightly downward toward the right side. It has a distribution plate 931 extending in the same direction. The distribution plate 931 is formed with three circular holes in plan view into which game balls can enter, arranged in the longitudinal direction of the distribution plate 931, so that one game ball can enter each. A 3R stopping portion 933, a 7R stopping portion 934, and a 15R stopping portion 935 are provided.

Below the sorting plate 931, the game balls entering the 3R parking portion 933, the 7R parking portion 934, and the 15R parking portion 935 are supported, and the game balls are sent to the 3R parking portion 933, the 7R parking portion 934, and the 15R parking portion. A stationary rotor 937 is provided as a stationary means that can be stationary at 935 . The stationary rotating body 937 has a substantially cylindrical shape, and is provided so as to extend in the left-right direction along the longitudinal direction of the distribution plate 931 with the center line of the cylindrical body serving as the center axis of rotation.

Further, on the outer peripheral surface of the stationary rotating body 937, discharge recesses 938 are formed at positions corresponding to the 3R stationary portion 933, the 7R stationary portion 934, and the 15R stationary portion 935, respectively, and can accommodate game balls. . Further, below the stationary rotating body 937, entrances of the 3R guide passage 743, the 7R guide passage 745, and the 15R guide passage 746 are provided.

As the stationary rotating body 937 rotates, the discharge concave portions 938 are repeatedly matched with the 3R stationary portions 933, the 7R stationary portions 934, and the 15R stationary portions 935 and the periods when they are not. there is That is, if the discharge recess 938 does not match the respective 3R stop 933, 7R stop 934, 15R stop 935 (discharge recess 938 faces downward), the 3R stop 933, 7R stop 934, 15R parking portion 935 is parked in the 3R parking portion 933, 7R parking portion 934, 15R parking portion 935. After that, when the stationary rotating body 937 rotates until the discharge concave portion 938 coincides with each of the 3R stationary portion 933, the 7R stationary portion 934, and the 15R stationary portion 935, the 3R stationary portion 933, the 7R stationary portion 934, and the 15R stationary portion 935 The parked game ball is accommodated in the corresponding ejection concave portion 938 . Furthermore, by rotating the stationary rotating body 937 , the game balls housed in the discharge recesses 938 enter the corresponding 3R guide passage 743 , 7R guide passage 745 , and 15R guide passage 746 . That is, the game ball parked in the 3R parking portion 933 enters the 3R guide passage 743, the game ball parked in the 7R parking portion 934 enters the 7R guide passage 745, and is parked in the 15R parking portion 935. The game ball enters the 15R guide passage 746 .

Further, the stationary rotating body 937 is driven by a stepping motor (not shown), and rotates so that the surface facing upward moves forward. Further, in the present embodiment, when there is no game ball entering the type lottery area 408, the stationary rotary body 937 is stopped in a reference posture (reference position) in which the ejection concave portion 938 faces downward. is configured as On the other hand, when a game ball is detected by the special entering ball detection switch 461 as an arrival detection means, the stepping motor is driven and the stationary rotating body 937 is configured to start rotating. In this embodiment, the stationary rotating body 937 is displaced from the standard posture to the receiving posture in which the discharge concave portion 938 faces upward in 6.5 seconds, and is displaced from the receiving posture to the standard posture in 3 seconds. is configured to In addition, the game balls stopped at the 3R stopping portion 933, the 7R stopping portion 934, and the 15R stopping portion 935 are simultaneously accommodated in the discharge recesses 938 of the stop rotating body 937, and are simultaneously discharged from the discharge recesses 938 into the 3R guide path. 743, 7R guide passage 745, 15R guide passage 746.

Incidentally, the stationary rotating body 937, which has returned to the reference posture after making one rotation, is stopped in this posture. Furthermore, during the jackpot state, the stationary rotating body 937 is configured to always rotate (until the end of the ending). Also, when the big win state ends, the remaining balls in the specific area 401 are checked, and if there are no remaining balls, the big win state ends. When it becomes more than that, an error message is displayed. In addition, there is an effective state in which the detection of the 3R-entering detection switch 736, the 7R-entering detection switch 735, and the 15R-entering detection switch 734 is effective, and an invalid state in which the detection is disabled. When the detection switch 735 and the 15R incoming ball detection switch 734 are detected, the state is switched to the invalid state, and when there are no remaining balls in the specific area 401 at the end of the jackpot state, the state is switched to the valid state.

Incidentally, the time from when the game ball housed in the special pocket portion 416a of the rotating body 414 enters the safe path 427 until it reaches the type lottery area 408 is about 2 seconds. In this embodiment, the state in which a game ball is housed in the ejection recess 938 of the stationary rotary body 937 and the stationary rotary body 937 is moving corresponds to the guiding state, and the other states correspond to the stationary state.

In addition, the 7R entry detection after the game ball enters the 7R induction passage 745 is longer than the 15R arrival time from when the game ball enters the 15R induction passage 746 until it is detected by the 15R entry detection switch 734. The 7R arrival time until detection by the switch 735 is longer (the movement distance is longer). It is configured so that the 3R arrival time until detection by the entering ball detection switch 736 is longer (the moving distance is longer). Therefore, when the game ball is parked in the 15R parking portion 935, regardless of whether the game ball is parked in the 3R parking portion 933 or the 7R parking portion 934, the "15R jackpot" jackpot state is established. will occur. Further, when the game ball is parked in the 7R parking portion 934 and the game ball is not parked in the 15R parking portion 935, regardless of whether the game ball is parked in the 3R parking portion 933, the "7R jackpot ” jackpot state is generated. Furthermore, when the game ball is parked in the 3R parking portion 933 and the game ball is not parked in the 7R parking portion 934 and the 15R parking portion 935, a "3R jackpot" jackpot state occurs. . It should be noted that, as in the above-described embodiment, when the occurrence of the big hit state or the big hit state is determined, the game ball is detected by the 3R ball detection switch 736, the 7R ball detection switch 735, and the 15R ball detection switch 734. Even if it is, the detection of the jackpot state corresponding to the detection is not given.

In addition, in the present embodiment, game balls that enter the 3R parking portion 933, the 7R parking portion 934, and the 15R parking portion 935 and are parked are detected at a position between the distribution plate 931 and the parking rotating body 937. A 3R standby detection switch 941, a 7R standby detection switch 942, and a 15R standby detection switch 943 are provided. Furthermore, on the vertical wall surface behind the sorting plate 931, there are 3R standby lamps 944 and 7R standby lamps 945 as entrance display portions corresponding to the rear positions of the 3R parking portion 933, 7R parking portion 934, and 15R parking portion 935. , 15R standby lamps 946 are provided.

In this embodiment, when the 3R standby detection switch 941 is detected, the 3R standby lamp 944 is lit, and when the 7R standby detection switch 942 is detected, the 7R standby lamp 945 is lit, When the 15R standby detection switch 943 is detected, the 15R standby lamp 946 is turned on, and when a predetermined jackpot state occurs, the various standby lamps 944, 945, 946 are turned off. Furthermore, in the decorative pattern display device 42, based on the detection information of the special ball detection switch 461, the display of "draw in jackpot type" is derived, and when the detection of the 15R standby detection switch 943 is performed, "15 rounds Congrats on the jackpot" is derived, and when the 7R standby detection switch 942 is detected and the 15R standby detection switch 943 is not detected, the display of "7 round jackpot or more confirmed" is derived. When the 3R standby detection switch 941 is detected and the 7R standby detection switch 942 and the 15R standby detection switch 943 are not detected, the 3R standby detection switch 941 is detected. Even if it is, the display of "During the jackpot type lottery" continues to be derived as it is. Based on the detection information of the standby detection switches 941, 942, and 943, the standby lamps 944, 945, and 946 are turned on, and the function of deriving the display of the decorative pattern display device 42 is the standby teaching means (early teaching means). ).

In addition, in this aspect example, the 3R parking portion 933, the 7R parking portion 934, and the 15R parking portion 935 are arranged in line from the upstream side in the sorting plate 931, and basically, the game balls are parked in the 3R parking portion 933. When the game ball enters the type lottery area 408 (start table 742) in a state where it is not set, the game ball enters the 3R stopping portion 933 and is stopped at the 3R stopping portion 933. there is

Furthermore, when the game ball enters the type lottery area 408 in a state where the game ball is stopped at the 3R stopping part 933, the game ball rides over the game ball stopped at the 3R stopping part 933 ( It reaches the 7R stopping portion 934 (as a stepping stone), enters the 7R stopping portion 934, and is stopped.

In addition, when the game ball enters the type lottery area 408 while the game ball is parked in the 3R parking portion 933 and the 7R parking portion 934, the game ball enters the 3R parking portion 933 and the 7R parking portion 934. It reaches the 15R stopping portion 935 over (using as a stepping stone) the game ball stopped at the 15R stopping portion 935, enters the 15R stopping portion 935, and is stopped.

In addition, adjacent to the downstream edge of the distribution plate 931, the game ball that did not enter any of the 3R parking portion 933, the 7R parking portion 934, and the 15R parking portion 935 is received, and the pachinko machine 10 A discharge port 948 for discharging to the outside is provided. In addition, in order to grasp the presence or absence of game balls (remaining balls) in the specific area 401, a discharge detection switch 949 for detecting game balls discharged from the discharge port 948 is provided, and when detection is performed, a ball entry counter is activated. is subtracted.

In this embodiment, the 3R stop 933 is the first stop for the 7R stop 934 and the 15R stop 935, and the 7R stop 934 is the second stop for the 3R stop 933. The first stop to stop 935 and the 15R stop 935 is the second stop to 3R stop 933 and 7R stop 934 . Furthermore, the 3R standby detection switch 941 is the first standby detection means for the 7R standby detection switch 942 and the 15R standby detection switch 943, and the 7R standby detection switch 942 is the second standby detection means for the 3R standby detection switch 941. , 15R standby detection switch 943 , and the 15R standby detection switch 943 is a second standby detection means for the 3R standby detection switch 941 and the 7R standby detection switch 942 . In addition, in this embodiment, the standby detection switches 941, 942, and 943 constitute early detection means, and the 3R stopping portion 933, the 7R stopping portion 934, the 15R stopping portion 935, the 3R guide passage 743, and the 7R guide passage 745 and 15R guide passage 746 constitute a ball entry route (a first ball entry route and a second ball entry route).

As described above, in this aspect example, the 3R stopping portion 933, the 7R stopping portion 934, and the 15R stopping portion 935 for stopping the game ball in the type sorting device 741 of the type lottery area 408 are provided, and the game ball is It is possible to grasp which jackpot type is given depending on where it is stopped. In other words, it is determined that the game ball stopped at the 3R stopping portion 933 will eventually be detected by the 3R entering ball detection switch 736, and the game ball stopped at the 7R stopping portion 934 will eventually be detected by the 7R entering ball detection switch 735. It is confirmed that the game ball stopped at the 15R stopping portion 935 will be detected by the 15R incoming ball detection switch 734 someday. In addition, for example, the game balls parked in the 3R parking portion 933, the 7R parking portion 934, and the 15R parking portion 935 entered the 3R guide passage 743, the 7R guide passage 745, and the 15R guide passage 746 all at once. In this case, among the 15R ball entry detection switch 734, 7R ball entry detection switch 735, and 3R ball entry detection switch 736, the switch that is more advantageous to the player is detected first. there is As a result, for example, when the game ball is parked in all of the 3R parking portion 933, the 7R parking portion 934, and the 15R parking portion 935, the game ball stopped in the 15R parking portion 935 is detected by the 15R entering ball detection switch. It is configured to generate a "15R jackpot" based on being detected by 734.

For this reason, for example, although the game ball parked in the 15R parking portion 935 is guided to the 15R guide passage 746, the game ball that has been parked in the 3R parking portion 933 or the 7R parking portion 934 is guided to the 3R guide passage 743 or the 7R guide passage To avoid the occurrence of an unfavorable phenomenon such as the possibility that the ``15R jackpot'' will not occur (it will result in a ``3R jackpot'' or a ``7R jackpot'') because the player is also guided to the guide passage 745.例文帳に追加can be done. Therefore, easy-to-understand playability is ensured, such as stopping the game ball in the 7R stopping part 934 rather than the 3R stopping part 933, and further stopping the game ball in the 15R stopping part 935 rather than the 7R stopping part 934. It is possible to clarify the points of excitement (highlights, places to focus).

Furthermore, when a lot of game balls enter the type lottery area 408, it becomes easier for the player to park the game balls in the parking portions 934 and 935 which are more advantageous to the player, and the game balls are parked in the 3R parking portion 933. Since there is no need to be afraid of this, it is possible to associate a lot of game balls entering the type lottery area 408, more fundamentally, the specific area 401, with being advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to completely eliminate the situation of having a negative image of entering the game ball into the specific area 401, and to ensure the gaming property of allowing the game ball to enter the specific area 401 as much as possible. can be

In addition, each stop portion 933, 934, 935 is formed in a concave shape that can accommodate one game ball. Therefore, the game balls stopped at the stopping portions 933 , 934 , 935 can be more reliably held (positioned) at the stopping portions 933 , 934 , 935 . Therefore, in a state in which the game balls are stopped in the sorting device 741, it is possible to more accurately judge whether or not the game balls are guided to which guide passages 743, 745, 746. becomes possible. In addition, compared to the configuration in which the game balls enter the guide passages 743, 745, 746 by flow without stopping, the fact that the game balls are guided to the guide passages 743, 745, 746 should be easily recognized. can be done. Furthermore, the game ball is guided to the 15R guide passage 746, the player can fully enjoy the state in which the occurrence of the "15R jackpot" is confirmed, and can more carefully see how the game ball is guided to the 15R guide passage 746. Therefore, it is possible to secure the game property that the game balls are parked on (each of the parking portions 933, 934 and 935 of) the type sorting device 741.

Further, in this embodiment, stand-by detection switches 941, 942 and 943 capable of detecting the game balls stopped at the respective stop portions 933, 934 and 935 are provided. Therefore, in a state in which the game ball is parked in the parking portions 933, 934, and 935, if the parked state is released, the game ball is guided to the 15R guide passage 746, for example ("15R jackpot" is It is possible to teach that the game ball is currently guided to the 3R guide path 743 (the "3R jackpot" will occur). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance in the stationary state in which the game balls are stationary in the type sorting device 741, and to improve the amusement.

In addition, in this embodiment, the 3R parking portion 933, the 7R parking portion 934, and the 15R parking portion 935 are arranged in this order from the upstream side in the type lottery area 408, and basically, the game ball is parked in the 3R parking portion 933. By setting the state where the game ball is stopped, the game ball can reach the 7R stopping portion 934 and can be stopped. can reach the 15R stopping portion 935 and be stopped. Therefore, by causing a plurality of game balls to reach the type lottery area 408, the player can enjoy stepping in an advantageous manner. In addition, it is possible to obtain a favorable impression that the game ball is parked in the 3R parking portion 933 or the 7R parking portion 934.例文帳に追加

In addition, the stationary rotating body 937 of this embodiment does not always keep moving, but is basically stopped in a reference posture in which the discharge concave portion 938 faces downward, and the detection of the special entering ball detection switch 461 is not performed. Start the action if done. Then, after making one rotation and returning to the reference posture, it stops. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game balls that have reached the type sorting device 741 pass through the type sorting device 741 without being stopped, as in the case where the stationary rotating body 937 continues to operate. can. Therefore, it is possible to more surely enjoy the real pleasure of enjoying the stationary state of the game balls on the type sorting device 741 .

In this embodiment, when the game ball enters the type lottery area 408 while the game ball is not parked in the 3R parking portion 933, the game ball enters the 3R parking portion 933, and the 3R When the game ball enters the type lottery area 408 in a state where the game ball is stopped at the stopping portion 933 and is stopped at the 3R stopping portion 933, the game ball is stopped at the 3R stopping portion 933. It reaches the 7R parking portion 934 over the ball (as a stepping stone), enters the 7R parking portion 934 and is stopped, and the game ball is stopped in the 3R parking portion 933 and the 7R parking portion 934. When the game ball enters the lottery area 408, the game ball climbs over the game balls stopped at the 3R stopping portion 933 and the 7R stopping portion 934 (as a springboard) and reaches the 15R stopping portion 935. , 15R parking portion 935 is designed to be parked, but even in a state where the game ball is not parked in the 3R parking portion 933, the game ball reaches the 7R parking portion 934 or the 15R parking portion 935. It may be configured so that it may enter the ball and be stopped. Even in the case of adopting such a configuration, the game ball reaches the 7R stopping portion 934 or the 15R stopping portion 935 in a state where the game ball is stopped rather than in a state where the game ball is not stopped in the 3R stopping portion 933. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the playability of aiming to enter a lot of game balls into the specific area 401.例文帳に追加

(v) Next, a modification of the classification sorting device 741 shown in FIG. 46 will be described. A classification board 951 is provided adjacent to a start table 742 in a classification device 741 of this embodiment, similarly to the classification device 741 of FIG. 45 . However, the types of jackpots given based on the detection of the special ball detection switch 461 of this embodiment are only "15 round jackpot" and "8 round jackpot". , an upper stop 952 and a lower stop 953 are provided. Also in this embodiment, the upper stopping portion 952 is on the upstream side, and the game ball is basically stopped in the upper stopping portion 952, so that the game ball can reach the lower stopping portion 953. However, the game ball may be configured to reach the lower stopping portion 953 even if the game ball is not stopped at the upper stopping portion 952 . However, even if only one game ball enters the type lottery area 408, some kind of jackpot type is always determined.

Below the sorting plate 951, a stopping shutter 954 is provided as a stopping means for stopping the game balls entering the upper stopping portion 952 and the lower stopping portion 953 at the upper stopping portion 952 and the lower stopping portion 953. there is The stationary shutter 954 extends in the horizontal direction and is configured to be horizontally displaceable between a protruding position protruding downward from the distribution plate 951 and an open position recessed in front of the game board 30. there is When the stationary shutter 954 is set to the projecting position, the type sorting device 741 capable of suspending the game ball at the upper stationary portion 952 and the lower stationary portion 953 is set to the stationary state, and the stationary shutter 954 is set to the open position. In this case, the game balls stopped at the upper stopping portion 952 and the lower stopping portion 953 are guided to the downstream side (distributor 954 to be described later). The stationary shutter 954 is set to the open position, for example, 5.5 seconds after the detection of the special ball detection switch 461, and is set to the projecting position (for example, 0.4 seconds after being set to the open position). always open position during state).

A distributor 954 (distributor) is provided below the stationary shutter 954 . The sorting device 954 has the same configuration as the route sorting device 703 of the above-described embodiment, and includes a shaft portion 957 supported by a shaft pin 956 and a first wing portion 958 projecting leftward from the shaft portion 957. , and a second wing portion 959 protruding rightward from the shaft portion 957, and has a bilaterally symmetrical shape. A first guide surface 958a, which is the upper surface of the first wing portion 958, slopes downward to the left, and a second guide surface 959a, which is the upper surface of the second wing portion 959, slopes downward to the right. Although the distributor 954 is rotatably supported, the first wing 958 and the second wing 959 extend left and right from the shaft 957 when no external force is applied.

Further, a first wing portion 958 (first guide surface 958a) is arranged directly below the upper stop portion 952, and a second wing portion 959 (second guide surface 959a) is arranged immediately below the lower stop portion 953. It is In this aspect example, when the game balls are parked in both the upper stopping portion 952 and the lower stopping portion 953, these game balls are the first wing portion 958 (the first guide surface 958a) and the second wing portion 959 ( They simultaneously fall at (substantially) equal left and right positions centering on the shaft portion 957 of the second guide surface 959a). In this way, when the game balls fall on the first wing portion 958 and the second wing portion 959 at the same time, the distributor 954 hardly rotates.

15R guide passages 960 are provided on the left side of the first wing portion 958 (first guide surface 958a) and on the right side of the second wing portion 959 (second guide surface 959a). Furthermore, an 8R guide passage 961 is provided below the sorter 954 . In addition, each 15R guide passage 960 is provided with a 15R incoming ball detection switch 962 for detecting a game ball guided to the 15R guide passage 960 . Further, an 8R incoming ball detection switch 963 for detecting a game ball guided to the 8R guide passage 961 is provided.

Then, when the stationary shutter 954 is moved to the open position from the state in which the game ball is stationary in one of the upper stationary portion 952 and the lower stationary portion 953, the weight of the game ball causes the distributor 954 to rotate. A game ball is guided to an 8R guide passage 961. - 特許庁On the other hand, when the stationary shutter 954 is set to the open position from the state in which the game balls are stationary in both the upper stationary portion 952 and the lower stationary portion 953, these gaming balls are transferred to the first wing portion 958 (the first It is guided to the 15R guide passage 960 by the guide surface 958a) and the second wing portion 959 (second guide surface 959a).

In addition, an upper early detection switch 964 for detecting a game ball stopped at the upper stopping portion 952 and a lower early detection switch 965 for detecting a game ball stopped at the lower stopping portion 953 are provided. In this embodiment, when both the upper early detection switch 964 and the lower early detection switch 965 are detected, the decorative pattern display device 42 displays that the winning of "15R jackpot" is rich, and upper early detection is performed. In a state where one of the switch 964 and the lower early detection switch 965 is detected and there is no possibility of the other being detected, the decorative pattern display device 42 displays that the winning of "8R jackpot" is rich. When one of the upper early detection switch 964 and the lower early detection switch 965 is detected and there is a possibility that the other is detected, the "15R jackpot" is won on the decorative pattern display device 42. A display indicating that there is a possibility (promotion acceptance display) is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first wing portion 958 (first guide surface 958a) and the second wing portion 959 (second guide surface 959a) when guiding the game ball to the 15R guide passage 960, and the 15R guide The passage 960 constitutes a second ball entry route (second guide passage in some cases), and the first wing portion 958 (first guide surface 958a) in the case of guiding the game ball to the 8R guide passage 961, or the second The wing portion 959 (second guide surface 959a) and the 8R guide passage 961 constitute a first ball entry route (first guide passage in some cases). In addition, in a state in which the game ball is stopped only in one of the upper stopping portion 952 and the lower stopping portion 953, the upper stopping portion 952 or the lower stopping portion 953 corresponds to the first stopping portion, and the upper stopping portion 952 and When the game ball is parked in both of the lower parking portions 953, the upper parking portion 952 and the lower parking portion 953 correspond to the second parking portion. By the way, in this embodiment, if the game ball is not parked in the upper stopping portion 952, the game ball is not parked in the lower stopping portion 953, so the upper stopping portion 952 is substantially the first stopping portion. , the lower stop 953 is the second stop.

As described above, in this embodiment, the type of jackpot is different depending on whether the game ball is parked in both of the upper stopping portion 952 and the lower stopping portion 953 or only one of them. there is In this configuration as well, it is possible to obtain the action and effect of letting players enjoy the stationary state of the game balls in the type sorting device 741 . In addition, in this aspect example, when the game ball is stopped in both the upper stopping portion 952 and the lower stopping portion 953, both game balls are guided to the 15R guide passage 960, while the 8R guide passage 961 Since it is constructed so as not to be guided, the game ball is parked in both of the upper stationary part 952 and the lower stationary part 953, and a ``15R jackpot'' jackpot state more advantageous to the player is provided. can be associated more reliably.

(w) Next, a modification of the type sorting device 741 shown in FIGS. 47(a) and 47(b) will be described. The type sorting device 741 of this aspect example is provided with a substantially disk-shaped croon 971 that guides game balls that enter the type lottery area 408 and pass through the start stand 742 . The croon 971 is positioned on the inner peripheral side of the outer peripheral portion 972 and the outer peripheral portion 972 in which the game ball that has passed through the start table 742 is first guided and the game ball can circulate according to its momentum. It has an inner peripheral portion 973 in which a plurality of stops 974 are arranged and formed in an annular shape.

In addition, in this embodiment, the winning lottery area 407 is omitted, the game ball entering the specific area 401 always enters the type lottery area 408, and the behavior of the game ball in the type lottery area 408 (winning destination) causes a big hit. It is configured such that the status is given and the type of jackpot to be given is determined. That is, there is a possibility that three or more game balls enter the type lottery area 408 in quick succession. In addition, the game ball is configured to reach the type lottery area 408 earlier when the game ball is guided to the special passage 702 than when the game ball is guided to the normal passage 701 by the route sorting device 703. It may be assumed that

Below the croon 971 , a stopping shutter 954 is provided as a stopping means for stopping the game ball entering the stopping portion 974 at the stopping portion 974 . The stationary shutter 975 extends in the horizontal direction and is configured to be horizontally displaceable between a protruding position protruding downward from the croon 971 and an open position retracting into the front surface of the game board 30. . When the stationary shutter 975 is set to the projecting position, the type sorting device 741 capable of stopping the game ball at the stationary portion 974 is set to the stationary state, and when the stationary shutter 975 is set to the open position, the stationary portion The game balls stopped at 974 are guided to the downstream side (distributor 976 described later), and the type distribution device 741 is guided. In addition, the stationary shutter 975 is set to the open position, for example, 5.5 seconds after the special ball detection switch 461 is detected, and is set to the projecting position (for example, 0.4 seconds after being set to the open position). always open position during state).

A distributor 976 (distributor) is provided below the stationary shutter 975 . The distributor 976 is configured to be rotatable so that the rotation axis is oriented in the front-rear direction. and a reference position where the receiving plate portion 978 extends in a substantially horizontal direction (slightly inclined downward to the left) and a maximum inclined position inclined downward by about 60 to 80 degrees from the reference position. It is configured to be displaceable between. Further, the distributor 976 is urged toward the reference position by a coil spring (not shown).

On the left side of the sorter 976, there is an off passage 979 through which game balls are guided by the sorter 976 at or near the reference position, and a game ball guided by the sorter 976 at or near the maximum tilt position. 15R guide path 980 is guided, and 8R guide path 981 is provided in which the game ball is guided by a distributor 976 at an intermediate position between the reference position and the maximum tilt position. When a game ball is detected by a detachment detection switch 982 provided in the detachment passage 979, 15 game balls are paid out to the upper tray 19.例文帳に追加When a game ball is detected by a 15R incoming ball detection switch 983 provided in a 15R guide passage 980, 15 game balls are paid out to the upper tray 19, and a "15R jackpot" jackpot state is started. . When a game ball is detected by an 8R incoming ball detection switch 984 provided in the 8R guide passage 981, 15 game balls are paid out to the upper tray 19, and the "8R jackpot" jackpot state is started. .

The 8R guide passage 981 is longer than the deviating passage 979, and the 15R guide passage 980 is longer than the 8R guide passage 981. As a result, the game ball guided to the 8R guide passage 981 or the 15R guide passage 980 is detected by the 8R entrance detection switch 984 or 15R before the game ball guided to the detachment passage 979 is detected by the detachment detection switch 982. The game ball guided to the 15R guide passage 980 is detected by the 15R entrance detection switch before the game ball guided to the 8R guide passage 981 is detected by the 8R entrance detection switch 984. It is configured to be detected by switch 983 .

Then, when the stationary shutter 975 is set to the open position from the state in which the game balls are stationary in the eight stationary portions 974, all the game balls stationary in the respective stationary portions 974 are sorted at the reference position. It will drop into the container 976 . In this embodiment, depending on the number and arrangement of the game balls parked in the eight stopping portions 974, the game balls are sorted to any of the off passage 979, the 15R guide passage 980, and the 8R guide passage 981. It's like That is, when the stationary shutter 975 is set to the open position while only one game ball is stationary in the stationary portion 974, even if the game ball falls on the sorter 976, the sorter 976 is substantially rotated. Without doing so, the game ball is guided to the exit passage 979 . When the stationary shutter 975 is set to the open position while the game balls are stationary in all of the eight stationary portions 974, when the game ball falls on the sorter 976, the sorter 976 rotates to the maximum open position. At least one of the game balls is guided to the 15R guide passage 980. In other cases, the larger the number of game balls placed on the stationary shutter 975, or the more game balls fall locally (on the tip side of the receiving plate portion 978) even with the same number of balls, the more the distribution device 976 tends to tilt greatly toward the maximum open position.

In addition, an early detection switch 985 is provided for detecting each game ball stopped at each stopping portion 974 . In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 displays suggestions such as the possibility of giving a jackpot state and which type of jackpot state is given based on the detection information of the early detection switch 985. It's like That is, when 8 game balls are parked in the rune 971, "15R jackpot expectation max" is displayed on the decoration pattern display device 42, and when 1 or 2 game balls are parked. , "Still doing my best" is displayed, and when 3 or 4 game balls are parked, "That condition" is displayed, and 5 to 7 game balls are parked. In this case, the message "Still available" is displayed. It should be noted that the suggestive display may be performed in consideration of not only the number information of the parked game balls but also the arrangement information.

In this embodiment, the ball entry route is formed by the sorter 976 together with the deviating passage 979 , the 15R guide passage 980 and the 8R guide passage 981 . Also, when the game ball parked in the parking portion 974 is guided to the 15R guide passage 980 or the 8R guide passage 981 which is advantageous for the player, the parking portion 974 in which the game ball has been parked is consequently It corresponds to the second stop.

As described above, depending on the number and arrangement of the game balls stopped by the type sorting device 741 (clone 971) in the stopped state, the stopped game balls are removed from the passage 979, the 15R guidance passage 980, and the 8R guidance. It is determined which of the passages 981 to be guided to. In other words, the player plays the game with the goal of stopping more game balls. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably achieve the above-described action and effect of allowing the player to enjoy the playability of allowing as many game balls as possible to enter the specific area 401 .

In addition, since early detection switches 985 are provided corresponding to the eight stationary portions 974 individually, it is possible to reliably grasp the number of stationary game balls and the like. Then, it is possible to perform an effect that the game balls are guided to the 15R guide passage 980, or that the game balls that are stopped are not enough (how many) to generate a big win state, etc. can be improved.

In the above (u), (v), and (w), the game ball stopped at the stopping portion is guided to the downstream side (guiding passage) as the bottom of the stopping portion comes off. However, for example, the stopping portion of the distribution plate is configured as a bottomed concave portion, and the distribution plate is configured to be rotatable by a driving means, and the distribution plate is stopped in a state where the game balls are stopped in the stopping portion. It may be configured such that the game ball stopped at the stopping portion is guided to the downstream side by rotating to the side where the portion faces downward.

[Appendix]
Technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiment will be described below.

A. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a pachinko machine, for example, is known as one type of gaming machine. A pachinko machine has a game area in which a game is played using game balls, the game balls are movable, and the game balls shot by the shooting means are guided to the game area.

Further, the pachinko machine is provided with specific ball entry means having a specific area into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and the game ball enters the starting ball entry means provided in the game area. Then, when the specific ball entry means is in an open state that allows the game ball to enter the specific area, and the game ball entering the specific area enters the special ball entry means in the same area, There is also a special game state that is advantageous to the player (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 11-197312).

In addition, in order to add interest to the behavior of the game ball from entering the specific area to the special ball entering means, the game ball entering the specific area is entered into the special ball entering means. There are some that are equipped with a sorting means that randomly sorts into those that allow the ball to enter and those that do not allow the ball to enter. Furthermore, a first guide route (normal route) capable of guiding a game ball that has entered a specific area to a special ball entry means while interposing the sorting means, etc., and a game ball that has entered the specific area There is also a second guide route (special route) that can guide the player to the special ball entry means at a higher probability than the first guide route.

By the way, when a plurality of game balls enter the specific area almost at the same time, it is considered that it is advantageous for the player to let the game balls enter the special ball entry means. However, there is a risk that game balls will interfere with each other (such as by colliding with each other at the entrance to the second guide route), making it impossible to enter the second guide route. be. As a result, when a plurality of game balls enter the specific area at the same time, contrary to the player's expectations, compared to the case where the game balls enter the specific area one by one, There is a concern that the expectation of entering the ball into the special special entry means will decrease.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its object is to advance the game more reliably and advantageously by allowing a plurality of game balls to collectively enter a specific area. To provide a game machine capable of

Means A-0-a. a game area in which game balls shot by the shooting means are guided;
A gaming machine comprising specific ball entry means having a specific area into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter,
The specific ball entry means is
a first ball entry means (non-special ball entry means) configured to allow a game ball entering the specific area to enter the game ball, and performing a first award when the game ball enters the specific area;
A second ball entry means ( special entry means) and
a guide passage for guiding a game ball entering the specific area to the first ball entering means or the second ball entering means;
The guide passage is
a first guide route capable of guiding the game ball entering the specific area to the second ball entering means;
a second guidance route capable of guiding a game ball entering the specific area to the second ball entry means at a higher probability than the first guidance route;
At the branch point between the first guide route and the second guide route, route sorting means for guiding the game ball entering the specific area to the first guide route or the second guide route is provided,
The route sorting means is
A first guide state for guiding the game ball to the first guide route and a second guide state for guiding the game ball to the second guide route,
By guiding one game ball to the route sorting means, the game ball can be guided in the first guiding state,
A game machine, wherein a plurality of game balls are guided to the route sorting means so that the game balls can be guided in the second guiding state.

According to the means A-0-a, there is provided a route sorting means that guides all of the plurality of game balls to the second guide route by allowing the plurality of game balls to enter the specific area. ing. For this reason, it is possible to make a plurality of game balls collectively enter the specific area and to increase the expectation of entering the special ball entry means. The player's expectation that the game balls will be entered into the special ball entry means will work advantageously because the balls are entered collectively, and the plurality of game balls are actually guided to the second guide route. By doing so, it is possible to match that the expectation of entering the special entering means is increased. Therefore, even if a plurality of game balls are collectively entered into the specific area, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the expected degree of occurrence of the special ball entry means is not contributed at all, or even lowered. On the other hand, it is possible to derive the behavior of the game ball that meets the player's expectation, such as increasing the expectation of the occurrence of the special ball entry means by collectively entering a plurality of game balls.

It should be noted that "When a game ball enters the first ball entering means, the first privilege is granted, and when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the player is more likely to receive the first privilege than the first privilege. Advantageous (beneficial) second privilege is given". The "first privilege" referred to here includes granting a first specified number of game values, granting a state such as making it easier to enter a ball in a specific ball-entering means, and the like. In addition, "the first advantageous state is given when the game ball enters the first ball entering means, and when the game ball enters the second ball entering means, the game is played more than the first advantageous state. a second advantageous state that is advantageous to the person". The term "first advantageous state" as used herein is not necessarily limited to cases in which a state advantageous to the player is imparted, and by imparting the first advantageous state, the status quo may be maintained or the status quo may be rendered more disadvantageous. This is intended to include the case of transitioning to another state.

Means A-0-b-1. The route sorting means is configured to be changeable between a standard posture for guiding the game ball to the second guide route and a changed posture for guiding the game ball to the first guide route,
The gaming machine according to means A-0-a, characterized in that the reference attitude is maintained by the game balls coming into contact with respective specific locations existing in a plurality of locations of the route sorting means.

According to means A-0-b, in order to maintain the reference position of the route sorting means, it is necessary to let a plurality of game balls enter the specific area and reach the route sorting means. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the game performance that it is more advantageous for the player to enter a plurality of game balls than to enter one game ball into the specific area. Furthermore, it is possible to add interest such that the guide destination of the game ball changes depending on the balance of the route sorting means when the game ball is guided.

Means A-0-b-2. The specific location includes a first specific location and a second specific location,
a first introduction path that guides the game ball entering the specific area to the first specific location;
A gaming machine according to means A-0-b-1, further comprising a second lead-in passage for guiding a game ball entering said specific region to said second specific location.

According to the means A-0-b-2, the chances of simultaneously contacting the game ball with respect to the first specific location and the second specific location are increased, and the game ball is brought into contact with the first specific location and the second specific location. The guiding (placing) position can be determined at a suitable position. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances that a plurality of game balls entering the specific area are all guided to the second guidance route.

Means A-0-b-3. a first entry detection means for detecting a game ball moving through the first introduction passage;
A game machine according to means A-0-b-2, further comprising a second entry detection means for detecting a game ball moving through the second introduction path.

According to the means A-0-b-3, it is possible to perform an effect such as teaching the player a happy moment when two game balls are simultaneously guided to the first specific location and the second specific location. can.

Means A-0-c. The route sorting means is configured to be changeable between a standard posture for guiding the game ball to the first guide route and a changing posture for guiding the game ball to the second guide route,
According to means A-0-a, the route sorting means is configured to be able to change the posture from the reference posture to the changed posture when a load of a specific amount or more is received from the game ball. game machine.

According to means A-0-c, in order to change the posture of the route sorting means to the changed posture, it is necessary to make a plurality of game balls enter the specific area and reach the route sorting means. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the game performance that it is more advantageous for the player to enter a plurality of game balls than to enter one game ball into the specific area. Furthermore, by supporting a large number of game balls by the route sorting means, it is possible to add amusement such as changing the guide destination of the game balls to a better one.

Means A-1. a game area in which game balls shot by the shooting means are guided;
A gaming machine comprising specific ball entry means having a specific area into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter,
The specific ball entry means is
a special ball entry means configured to allow a game ball that has entered the specific region to enter the game ball, and to provide a special game state advantageous to the player when the game ball has entered the specific area;
a non-special ball entry means for entering a game ball other than the game ball entering the special ball entry means among the game balls that entered the specific area;
a guide passage for guiding the game ball entering the specific area to the special ball entry means or the non-special ball entry means;
The guide passage is
a first guide route capable of guiding a game ball that has entered the specific area to the special ball entry means;
a second guide route capable of guiding a game ball entering the specific area to the special ball entry means at a higher probability than the first guide route;
At the branch point between the first guide route and the second guide route, route sorting means for guiding the game ball entering the specific area to the first guide route or the second guide route is provided,
The route sorting means is
When one game ball is sorted by guiding one game ball to the route sorting means, guiding the one game ball to the first guide route,
By simultaneously guiding a plurality of game balls to the route distributing means, when distributing a plurality of game balls at the same time, all of the plurality of game balls can be guided to the second guide route. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the means A-1, when a plurality of game balls enter a specific area substantially at the same time, a route sorting means is provided which can guide all of the plurality of game balls to the second guide route. there is For this reason, it is possible to make a plurality of game balls collectively enter the specific area and to increase the expectation of entering the special ball entry means. The player's expectation that the game balls will be entered into the special ball entry means will work advantageously because the balls are entered collectively, and the plurality of game balls are actually guided to the second guide route. By doing so, it is possible to match that the expectation of entering the special entering means is increased. Therefore, even if a plurality of game balls are collectively entered into the specific area, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the expected degree of occurrence of the special ball entry means is not contributed at all, or even lowered. On the other hand, it is possible to derive the behavior of the game ball that meets the player's expectation, such as increasing the expectation of the occurrence of the special ball entry means by collectively entering a plurality of game balls.

It should be noted that the route sorting means may guide the game ball to the first guide route when sorting one game ball.

Means A-2. The route sorting means is
a shaft portion rotatably supported;
a first wing portion projecting from the shaft portion toward one side of the shaft portion;
a second wing protruding from the shaft toward the other side of the shaft,
The first wing portion and the second wing portion are in a balanced state in a reference posture protruding to both sides from the shaft portion, and form upper surfaces of the first wing portion and the second wing portion in the reference posture. (and inclined downward toward both sides) the guide surface communicates with the second guide route,
A game ball entering the specific area is guided by the guide surface of the first wing portion or the second wing portion,
When the game ball is guided by the first wing portion or the second wing portion, the route distribution means rotates due to the force received from the game ball, and the route distribution means rotates to guide the game ball. The surface communicates with the first guide route, and the game ball is guided to the first guide route;
When the game ball is guided almost simultaneously to the first wing and the second wing, (the weight of the first wing and the weight of the second wing are balanced) ,) the first wing portion is maintained by maintaining the reference posture (restricting the rotation of the route sorting means) and maintaining the reference posture (avoiding the rotation of the route sorting means); and the game ball guided by the second wing is guided to the second guide route, respectively.

According to the means A-2, it is possible to realize a configuration that guides a plurality of (two) game balls to the second guide route at the same time while adopting a relatively simple configuration. Further, for example, in the route sorting means, it is possible to prevent problems caused by deterioration of the elastic body, compared to the case of using an elastic body such as a spring or rubber. Furthermore, there is no need to provide driving means for driving the route allocation means, so that the configuration and control can be simplified and made compact. In addition, compared to a configuration in which a detecting means and a driving means for detecting game balls are used and the route is switched depending on whether or not there are a plurality of game balls, the player may have a sense of distrust. can be reduced, and fairness can be appealed.

Means A-3. A ball entry opening serving as an entrance to the specific region of the specific ball entry means and a pair of blade members for opening and closing the ball entry opening are provided,
A game ball that has entered the specific area through the first ball-entering opening of the ball-entering openings is guided to the first wing (dropped onto the guide surface of the first wing). 1 introduction passage;
A game ball that has entered the specific area through a second ball-entering opening of the ball-entering openings is guided to the second wing (dropped onto the guide surface of the second wing). 2 introduction passages, and the game machine according to means A-2.

According to means A-3, the chances of simultaneously contacting the game ball with the first wing and the second wing are increased, and the game ball is guided (placed) with respect to the first wing and the second wing. ) can be set to a preferred location. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances that a plurality of game balls entering the specific area are all guided to the second guidance route. In addition, it is possible to impart a playability such that a game ball is made to enter (aim and desire) the game ball into either of the left and right ball entry openings.

Means A-4. a first entry detection means for detecting a game ball moving through the first introduction passage;
A second entry detection means for detecting a game ball moving in the second introduction passage,
In the process of determining whether or not the first entry detection means and the second entry detection means are detected, either the detection of both the first entry detection means and the second entry detection means is confirmed. A gaming machine according to means A-3, characterized in that a different effect is derived when only one detection is confirmed.

According to the means A-4, it is possible for the player to recognize and enjoy the moment when two game balls are simultaneously guided to the first wing and the second wing of the route sorting means. can.

Means A-5. The route sorting means is
a shaft part rotatably supported such that the central axis extends in the left-right direction;
a front piece projecting forward from the shaft and arranged in the specific region;
a rear piece projecting rearward from the shaft,
In the route sorting means, the weight of the front piece side of the shaft portion is lighter than the weight of the rear piece portion side of the shaft portion,
The front piece closes the second guide route, and the guide surface constituting the upper surface of the front piece communicates with the first guide route and is inclined downward toward the first guide route. ) and is balanced in the reference posture,
A game ball entered by the specific ball entry means is guided by the guide surface of the front piece,
In the case where a specified number or more of game balls are placed on the front piece portion of the route distribution means in the reference posture, the front piece of the route distribution means is placed more than the shaft portion. The weight of the portion side becomes heavier than the weight of the rear piece portion than the shaft portion, and the route sorting means rotates so that the front piece portion tilts downward, and the route sorting means rotates. By rotating, the guide surface communicates with the second guide route, and the game ball is guided to the second guide route,
When the number of game balls placed on the front piece portion of the route sorting means in the reference posture is less than the specified number, the weight of the front piece side of the route sorting means is higher than the shaft portion. However, the weight of the rear piece side is lighter than the weight of the shaft portion, and the reference posture of the route sorting means is maintained (rotation is avoided), and the game ball is guided to the first guide route. The game machine according to means A-1, characterized in that

According to means A-5, it is possible to realize a configuration that guides a plurality of game balls to the second guide route at the same time while adopting a relatively simple configuration. Further, for example, in the route sorting means, it is possible to prevent problems caused by deterioration of the elastic body, compared to the case of using an elastic body such as a spring or rubber. Furthermore, there is no need to provide driving means for driving the route allocation means, so that the configuration and control can be simplified and made compact.

Means A-6. The specific ball entry means is
Special ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special ball entry means (and
a non-special ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the non-special ball entry means;
When a game ball is detected by the special ball entry detection means (during the special game state or in a state other than the state in which the right to generate the special game state has already been obtained) the special game state In gaming machines that are granted the right to generate
A type lottery area in which the gaming ball that enters the special ball entry means and is detected by the special ball entry detection means is guided,
In a state where a game ball exists in the type lottery area, another game ball enters the special ball entry means and can enter the type lottery area,
In the type lottery area,
A first type ball entering means that can enter a game ball, and a second type ball entering means,
a first type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first type ball entry means;
a second type ball entry detection means for detecting a gaming ball that has entered the second type ball entry means;
When a game ball is detected by the first type entering ball detection means, In the state, the type of the special game state to which the right to generate is granted is the first special game state,
When a game ball is detected by the second type entering ball detection means, In the state, the type of the special game state to which the right to generate is granted is a second special game state that is more advantageous for the player than the first special game state;
The first type determination time until the game ball that has entered the type lottery area is detected by the first type entering ball detection means,
Means A-1 to A-1 characterized in that the game ball entering the type lottery area is longer than the second type determination time until it is detected by the second type entering ball detection means. -5 the gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the means A-6, basically the same effect as the means B-1, which will be described later, can be obtained. Further, when adopting the configuration of means A-1, when a plurality of game balls enter the specific area at substantially the same time, all of these game balls are likely to be guided to the second guide route, and furthermore, , the possibility that a plurality of game balls enter the special ball entering means in succession increases. Therefore, in such a configuration, by adopting the configuration of this means A-6 that does not waste the continuous entry of a plurality of game balls into the special ball entry means, a plurality of game balls can be entered into the special ball entry means. It is possible to more effectively achieve the effect of suppressing the decrease in interest caused by the fact that the game balls enter the game continuously and is useless or loses money.

B. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a pachinko machine, for example, is known as one type of gaming machine. A pachinko machine has a game area in which a game is played using game balls, the game balls are movable, and the game balls shot by the shooting means are guided to the game area.

Further, the pachinko machine is provided with specific ball entry means having a specific area into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and the game ball enters the starting ball entry means provided in the game area. Then, when the specific ball entry means is in an open state that allows the game ball to enter the specific area, and the game ball entering the specific area enters the special ball entry means in the same area, There is also a special game state that is advantageous to the player (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 11-197312).

By the way, in the middle of the special game state, or in the state where the right of the special game state is obtained, even if the game ball enters the special ball entry means, a further (for that amount) special game state is granted. not. In other words, even if a relatively rare phenomenon such as a plurality of game balls continuously entering the special ball entry means occurs, the right to be granted the special game state is only once, and the player loses. , and the impression that it is a waste. As a result, there is a concern that the player will not be happy to let go even though a favorable situation for the player, such as the provision of a special game state, has arrived.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its object is to suppress the decline in interest caused by a plurality of game balls entering the special ball entry means in succession. To provide a game machine capable of

Means B-0-a. a game area in which game balls shot by the shooting means are guided;
a specific ball entry means having a specific area into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter;
The specific ball entry means is
In a state where a game ball exists in the specific area, another game ball can enter the specific area,
In the specific area,
A first type ball entering means that can enter a game ball, and a second type ball entering means,
a first type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first type ball entry means;
a second type ball entry detection means for detecting a gaming ball that has entered the second type ball entry means;
When the game ball is detected by the first type entering ball detection means, the first award is performed,
When a game ball is detected by the second type entering ball detection means, a second award that is more advantageous to the player than the first award is performed,
The first type determination time until the game ball entering the specific area is detected by the first type ball detection means,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is constructed such that a game ball entering the specific region is detected by the second type entering ball detecting means longer than the second type determination time.

It should be noted that "when a gaming ball is detected by the first type entering ball detecting means, the first privilege is provided, and when a gaming ball is detected by the second type entering ball detecting means, the first privilege is provided. A second privilege that is more advantageous (beneficial) for the player than the above may be provided. The "first privilege" referred to here includes granting a first prescribed number of game values, granting a state such as making it easier to enter a ball in a specific ball-entering means, and the like. Further, "when a game ball is detected by the first type entering ball detecting means, the first advantageous state is given, and when a game ball is detected by the second type entering ball detecting means, the first advantageous state is provided. A second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the advantageous state is given." The "first advantageous state" referred to here is not necessarily limited to the case in which a state advantageous to the player is provided, and by providing the first advantageous state, the status quo can be maintained or the status quo can be made more disadvantageous. This is intended to include the case of transitioning to another state.

Means B-0-b. In the specific area,
a first guide passage for leading the game ball to the first type ball entry means;
a second guide passage for leading the game ball to the second type ball entry means;
A type sorting means for guiding a game ball that has reached a predetermined position in the specific area to the first guide path or the second guide path is provided,
The entrance of the first guide path is arranged upstream of the movement path of the game ball in the specific area from the entrance of the second guide path,
The game machine according to means B-0-a, wherein the first guide path is configured to take a longer time for a game ball to pass through than the second guide path.

Means B-0-c. A covering means arranged so as to cover the front of the first guide passage is provided,
The game machine according to means B-0-b, wherein the visibility of the game ball changes before and after the game ball enters the first guide path.

Means B-0-d. The means B-0-b or means B-0-c according to means B-0-b or means B-0-c, characterized in that an entrance display portion indicating each entrance of the first guide passage and the second guide passage is provided so as to be visible from the front. game machine.

Means B-1. a game area in which game balls shot by the shooting means are guided;
a specific ball entry means having a specific area into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter;
The specific ball entry means is
a special ball entry means that allows a game ball that has entered the specific area to enter;
(Non-special ball entry means for entering a game ball other than the game ball entering the special ball entry means among the game balls that entered the specific area, and
Special ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special ball entry means (and
a non-special ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the non-special ball entry means),
When the game ball is detected by the special ball entry detection means, it is advantageous for the player (during the special game state, or in a state other than the state in which the right to generate the special game state has already been obtained, ) In a game machine that is granted the right to generate a special game state,
A type lottery area in which the gaming ball that enters the special ball detection means and is detected by the special ball detection means is guided,
In a state where a game ball exists in the type lottery area, another game ball enters the special ball entry means and can enter the type lottery area,
In the type lottery area,
A first type ball entering means that can enter a game ball, and a second type ball entering means,
a first type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first type ball entry means;
a second type ball entry detection means for detecting a gaming ball that has entered the second type ball entry means;
When a game ball is detected by the first type entering ball detection means, In the state, the type of the special game state to which the right to generate is granted is the first special game state,
When a game ball is detected by the second type entering ball detection means, In the state, the type of the special game state to which the right to generate is granted is a second special game state that is more advantageous for the player than the first special game state;
The first type determination time until the game ball that has entered the type lottery area is detected by the first type entering ball detection means,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is constructed such that a game ball that has entered the type lottery area is detected by the second type entering ball detection means longer than the second type determination time.

According to the means B-1, the game ball that has entered the special ball entry means is detected by the special ball entry detection means, and is not discharged outside the game area (specific area), but in the specific area. It is configured to enter a type lottery area, which is a part. Then, an analog lottery (type lottery) for determining the type of the special game state, such as whether the game ball enters the first type ball entering means or the second type ball entering means, is performed. It's becoming Therefore, when the game balls continuously enter the special ball entering means, the special game state to be given corresponds to the game ball first detected by the special ball entering detecting means among the game balls continuously passing. All of the plurality of game balls that enter the special ball entry means almost continuously can be utilized for the subsequent type lottery, although it is only one time.

Furthermore, the first type determination time until the game ball that has entered the type lottery area is detected by the first type entering ball detection means that triggers the occurrence of the first special game state is longer than the first special game state. It is configured to be longer than the second type determination time until it is detected by the second type entering ball detection means that triggers the occurrence of the second special game state that is advantageous to the player. For this reason, for example, among a plurality of game balls continuously entering the special ball entering means, the leading game ball heads for the first type ball entering means, and the subsequent game ball heads for the second type ball entering means. Even in this case, it is possible to cause the second special game state more advantageous to the player by first entering the subsequent game ball into the second type ball entering means. Therefore, subsequent game balls can be more reliably utilized. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player's feeling that it is a loss or a waste of time when a plurality of game balls successively enter the special ball entry means, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in interest caused by it. can.

Means B-2. In the type lottery area,
a first guide passage for leading the game ball to the first type ball entry means;
a second guide passage for leading the game ball to the second type ball entry means;
A type sorting means for guiding the game ball that has entered the type lottery area to the first guide path or the second guide path is provided,
The entrance of the first guide path is arranged upstream of the movement path of the game ball in the type lottery area from the entrance of the second guide path,
The game machine according to means B-1, wherein the first guide path is configured to take a longer time for a game ball to pass through than the second guide path.

According to the means B-2, the game ball that entered the type lottery area was not guided to the first type ball entering means in the type sorting means (it was not dropped by the "sieve" corresponding to the first type ball entering means). ), the game ball is guided to the second type ball entering means. In other words, it is possible to expect excitement in the game by bringing the ball entering the second type ball entering means that is advantageous for the player later (making it so that the one that remains until the end will have a good result). can.

In addition, such a configuration is adopted in which the entrance of the passage that can be expected to generate a special game state that is more advantageous to the player, out of the first guide passage and the second guide passage, is arranged on the downstream side. In this case, for example, when two game balls enter the type lottery area consecutively, even if the preceding game ball is guided to the second guide path by the type sorting means, the following game ball is sorted by type. When guided to the first guide path side by means, the subsequent game balls reach the first guide path earlier.

In this regard, according to this means, the first guide path is configured to take a longer time for the game ball to pass (longer distance, looser angle, etc.) than the second guide path. For this reason, for example, even though the preceding game ball was guided to the second guide path, the subsequent game ball is guided to the first guide path, and the preceding game ball is the second type entering means. It is possible to more reliably avoid the situation in which the subsequent game ball enters the first type ball entering means before entering the ball and the first special game state occurs.

In addition, the second guide passage only needs to have a shorter time required for the game ball to pass through than the first guide passage. Conceptually, the second guiding path whose distance is zero) is also included. Also, in order to lengthen the time required for the game ball to pass through the first guide path, it is conceivable to lengthen the moving distance of the game ball required to pass through the first guide path. In addition to the configuration that lengthens the length of the game ball, for example, a delay means such that the game ball moves forward after reciprocating or circling the same place several times, and the momentum of the game ball is temporarily stopped to take a relatively long time. A configuration may be adopted in which a delay means for guiding to the next place is installed in the first guiding passage. Incidentally, the delay means may be installed in the second guide path, but in that case, the time required for the game ball to pass through the second guide path is longer than the time required for the game ball to pass through the first guide path. Install something that does not last long.

Means B-3. An early detection means for detecting a game ball moving in the first guide path is provided,
The method according to B-2, characterized in that, when the detection by the early detection means is performed, a preceding opening effect suggesting the start of the first special game state can be derived. game machine.

Although it is determined that the game ball entering the first guide path enters the first type ball entering means, the passage time of the game ball through the first guide path is longer than that of the second guide path. Due to the configuration, there is a relatively long time lag between when the game ball enters the first guide passage and when it enters the first type ball entering means (until it is detected by the first type entering ball detecting means). may occur. In this case, for example, when the game ball enters the special ball entry means in a single shot and further enters the first guide passage, it is decided that the first special game state will occur at this point (player However, it takes a relatively long time for the game ball to pass through the first guide path, and it is difficult to get the first game ball. It is conceivable that a situation is caused in which the special game state is not started.

In this regard, according to the means B-3, when the game ball is detected by the early detection means installed in the first guide passage, the advance opening effect is derived that suggests the start of the first special game state. Since it is configured to be possible, such concerns can be dispelled. Therefore, it takes too much time (without any reaction) from when the occurrence of the first special game state is practically decided until the first special game state starts, and the tempo of the game slows down. It is possible to prevent a situation such as causing a decrease in interest.

Note that the preceding opening effect is different from the opening effect that is performed as part of the special game state, and is not included in the first special game state (even if it looks the same, it is a pseudo opening effect). The first special game state is not started when detection is performed by the early detection means, but the first special game state is started when detection is performed by the first ball-entering detection means.

In addition, "uncertain element determination processing for determining whether or not game balls other than the game ball for which the detection is performed exist in the specific area when detection is performed by the early detection means; When a negative determination is made in the deterministic element determination process, it corresponds to the ball entering the first type ball entering means guided by the first guide passage provided with the early detection means in which the game ball was detected. and a preceding opening process for deriving a preceding opening effect for teaching that the first special game state is to be started." In this case, before the game ball detected by the early detection means is detected by the first type ball detection means, another game ball is detected by the first type ball detection means or the second type ball detection means. By detecting it, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a contradiction arises between the mode of the preceding opening performance and the type of the special game state that actually occurs, and the first special game state is generated in the preceding opening performance. can be taught. In the preceding opening effect, if the type of special game state is not taught (if it is only taught that one of the first special game state and the second special game state will occur), such a problem will not occur. Although it does not occur, if the type of the special game state can be taught, the performance can be improved and the player can be given a sense of security.

Means B-4. The first special game state includes a first opening pattern in which an opening effect for teaching that the first special game state is started is performed for a first time, and a second pattern in which the opening effect is shorter than the first time. There is a second opening pattern that is performed for a period of time or that the opening effect is omitted,
When the first type entering ball detection means is detected and the first special game state is generated, the second opening pattern is selected when the preceding opening effect is derived. The game machine according to the characteristic means B-3.

According to the means B-4, when the preceding opening effect is being performed, the opening effect of the first time is further performed, thereby preventing the opening effect from becoming too long. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably avoid problems such as deterioration of the tempo of the game.

Means B-5. entry detection means for detecting all game balls (immediately after) entering the specific area on the upstream side of the special ball entry means and the non-special ball entry means;
The number of game balls in the specific area can be counted, a value is added based on detection by the entry detection means, and the non-special ball entry detection means, the early detection means, and the second type A gaming machine according to means B-3 or B-4, further comprising first counting means for subtracting a value based on detection by the entering ball detection means.

According to the means B-5, for example, it is determined whether or not a ball jam has occurred, or whether or not there are game balls other than the game balls detected by the early detection means in the specific area. be able to discriminate, etc. Therefore, it is possible to perform error processing caused by ball jamming, improve the accuracy of the preceding opening effect, increase the amount of information of the preceding opening effect, and improve the game performance and performance. .

Means B-6. When the detection of the early detection means is performed, based on the value of the first count means, the downstream side of the entry detection means, the non-special entrance detection means, the early detection means, and the first It is determined whether or not a game ball exists in an area upstream of the two-type ball entry detection means, and if it is determined that it does not exist, the preceding opening effect is derived, and if it is determined that it exists, the above-mentioned A promotion accepting state teaching means is provided for teaching that the type of the special game state is not yet determined (the possibility of allowing the game ball to enter the second guide passage is left). The gaming machine according to means B-5, characterized by:

According to the means B-6, for example, when two game balls enter the type lottery area and the preceding game ball enters the first guide passage, the first special game state still does not occur. It is possible for the player to surely recognize that the second special game state may still occur unless the subsequent game ball enters the first guide path. can. Therefore, it is possible to have the player understand the game characteristics more reliably, and in the case of the above example, the behavior of the subsequent game balls, the continuous entry of the game balls into the type lottery area, etc. You can have a stronger interest in.

Means B-7. The number of game balls in the specific area can be counted, the value is added based on the detection of the early detection means, and the value is subtracted based on the detection of the first type entering ball detection means. 2 count means.

According to the means B-7, for example, it is possible to determine whether or not ball clogging has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to perform error processing caused by ball jamming, improve the accuracy of the preceding opening effect, increase the amount of information of the preceding opening effect, and improve the game performance and performance. .

Means B-8. The specific ball entry means includes a guide passage for guiding the game ball entering the specific area to the special ball entry means or the non-special ball entry means,
The guide passage is
a first guide route capable of guiding a game ball that has entered the specific area to the special ball entry means;
a second guide route capable of guiding a game ball entering the specific area to the special ball entry means at a higher probability than the first guide route;
At the branch point between the first guide route and the second guide route, route sorting means for guiding the game ball entering the specific area to the first guide route or the second guide route is provided,
The route sorting means is
When one game ball is sorted by guiding one game ball to the route sorting means, guiding the one game ball to the first guide route,
By simultaneously guiding a plurality of game balls to the route distributing means, when distributing a plurality of game balls at the same time, all of the plurality of game balls can be guided to the second guide route. The game machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-7, characterized in that

According to the means B-8, basically the same effects as those of the above means A-1 can be obtained. Further, when adopting the configuration of the means B-8, when a plurality of game balls enter the specific area at substantially the same time, all of these game balls are likely to be guided to the second guide route, As a result, there is a high possibility that a plurality of game balls will continuously enter the special ball entering means. Therefore, in such a configuration, by adopting the configuration of the means B-1 that does not waste the continuous entry of a plurality of game balls into the special ball entry means, a plurality of games can be played in the special ball entry means. It is possible to more effectively achieve the effect of suppressing the decrease in interest caused by the fact that the balls enter the game in succession to be useless or lose money.

Means B-9. A covering means arranged to cover the front of the first guide passage (reducing the visibility of the first guide passage) is provided,
The game machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-8, wherein the visibility of the game ball changes before and after the game ball enters the first guide path.

According to the means B-9, the entrance of the first guide passage can be regarded as the entrance of the first type ball entering means. Therefore, basically, it is possible to make it easier to understand the premise of the game property that the first special game state will occur if the ball enters the entrance of the first guide passage. In addition, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the design and making the type lottery area appear complicated by visually recognizing the first guide passage having a shape that delays the game ball.

Means B-10. a first guiding path for leading the game ball moving in the specific area to the first type ball entering means;
In the configuration comprising a second guide passage for leading the game ball moving in the specific area to the second type ball entering means,
The game machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-9, wherein an entrance display portion indicating each entrance of the first guide passage and the second guide passage is provided so as to be visible from the front. .

According to the means B-10, the locations of the entrances of the first guide path and the second guide path are clarified, and the game property such as which of the first guide path and the second guide path the game ball enters is made easier to understand. can do. Incidentally, the entrance display section may be configured so as to be changeable based on the detection information of the early detection means. In this case, it is possible to make it easier to determine whether or not the game ball has entered the corresponding entering ball route.

Means B-11. An entry detection means for detecting all game balls that have entered (immediately after) the specific area on the upstream side of the special ball entry means and the non-special ball entry means,
Means B-1 to B, characterized by comprising detection history storage means for accumulating and storing detection information of the entry detection means, the first type entrance detection means, and the second type entrance detection means. -10.

According to the means B-11, since the behavior history of the game ball in the specific area is left more clearly, a trouble occurs between the player and the game hall as to where the game ball entered, which complicates the problem. can be avoided. It should be noted that the detection history storage means may also be configured to accumulate and store the detection information of the early detection means. In this case, it is possible to more reliably investigate misunderstandings and the like including advance opening effects. Also, the contents stored in the detection history storage means may be configured to be able to be derived to the display means of the gaming machine. Furthermore, the detection information may be output to the outside so that the same detection information as that stored in the detection history storage means can also be grasped by the hall computer. In addition, when the time of the time grasping means for grasping the current time provided in the gaming machine and the detection history are stored in association with each other, such an effect is exhibited more remarkably.

Means B-12. Type entry detection means for detecting a game ball entering the type lottery area;
vibration detection means for detecting vibration of the game machine;
a display means;
Any one of the means B-1 to B-11, wherein when the detection by the type entry detection means is performed, a display calling attention not to vibrate the gaming machine is derived on the display means. The gaming machine described in Crab.

According to the means B-12, it is possible to prevent the player from swinging the gaming machine due to being too enthusiastic about the game, and the swinging of the gaming machine causes a change in the behavior of the game ball. Such situations can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game machine from vibrating, which is undesirable for both the player and the game hall where the game machine is installed.

C. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, pachinko machines and the like are known as one type of gaming machines. A pachinko machine has a game area in which a game is played using game balls, the game balls are movable, and the game balls shot by the shooting means are guided to the game area.

Further, the pachinko machine is provided with specific ball entry means having a specific area into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and the game ball enters the starting ball entry means provided in the game area. Then, when the specific ball entry means is in an open state that allows the game ball to enter the specific area, and the game ball that has entered the specific area enters the special ball entry means in the same area, There is also a special game state that is advantageous to the player (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 11-197312).

By the way, as a game machine, there is a demand for improvement of new interest by always adopting a new configuration.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of adding new interest.

Means C-1. a game area in which game balls shot by the shooting means are guided;
a specific ball entry means having a specific area into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter;
The specific ball entry means is
In a state where a game ball exists in the specific area, another game ball can enter the specific area,
In the specific area,
A first type ball entering means that can enter a game ball, and a second type ball entering means,
a first type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first type ball entry means;
a second type ball entry detection means for detecting a gaming ball that has entered the second type ball entry means;
When the game ball is detected by the first type entering ball detection means, the first award is performed,
In a gaming machine in which, when a game ball is detected by the second type entering ball detection means, a second award that is more advantageous to the player than the first award is performed,
A game ball moving in the specific area is configured to be able to enter, and the game ball that has entered is sure to enter the first type entering ball means (detected by the first type entering ball detecting means). entry route,
A game ball moving in the specific area is configured to be able to enter, and the game ball that has entered is sure to enter the second type entering ball means (detected by the second type entering ball detecting means). entry route,
Early detection means provided on at least one of the first ball entry route and the second ball entry route and detecting a game ball;
and an early teaching means capable of teaching information about the detection by the early detection means.

According to the means C-1, the game ball enters the first type ball entering means or the second type ball entering means, etc. It can be grasped at a stage before the ball is played, and corresponding teaching can be performed. Therefore, an effect relating to the entry of the game ball into the first type ball entering means or the second type ball entering means can be performed from the stage before the ball is entered. In addition, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a sense of incongruity that there is no corresponding reaction (sound effect, display, etc.) even though it should have been decided that the ball will be entered by the first-type ball-entering means or the second-type ball-entering means.

Means C-2. The entrance of the first ball entry route is arranged upstream of the movement path of the game ball in the specific area from the entrance of the second ball entry route,
The first ball entry route is configured so that the time required for the game ball to pass is longer than the second ball entry route,
The gaming machine according to means C-1, wherein the early detection means comprises a first early detection means provided at least on the first ball entry route.

According to means C-2, a game ball that has entered the specific area can enter the second ball entry route if it has not entered the first ball entry route. In other words, it is possible to expect excitement in the game by bringing the ball entering the second type ball entering means, which is advantageous for the player, later (making it so that the one remaining until the end has a good result). can.

In addition, among the first ball-entering route and the second ball-entering route, the entrance of the second ball-entering route, which is expected to give the second ball more advantageous to the player, is arranged on the downstream side. When adopting such a configuration, for example, when two game balls enter the specific area in succession, even if the preceding game ball is guided to the second entry route side, the following game ball is the first If guided to the incoming ball route side, there is concern that the subsequent game ball may reach the first incoming ball route earlier.

In this respect, according to this means, the first ball entry route is configured to take longer time for the game ball to pass than the second ball entry route (longer distance, looser angle, etc.). . For this reason, for example, although the preceding game ball was guided to the second entry route, the subsequent game ball was guided to the first entry route, and the preceding game ball entered the second type. It is possible to more reliably avoid the situation in which the subsequent game ball enters the first type ball entering means before entering the ball means and the first award is generated.

Furthermore, when the time required for the game ball to pass through the first ball entry route is lengthened, the game ball enters the first ball entry route, enters the first ball entry means, and enters the first ball entry route. There is concern that a relatively large time lag will occur until the ball is detected by the ball detecting means. In this means, an early detection switch is provided in the first ball entry route, and it is possible to derive a reaction (sound effect, display, etc.) corresponding to the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry route. Become. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a sense of incongruity due to the deviation between the behavior of the game ball and the reaction of the game machine.

Means C-3. The method according to means C-2, characterized in that, when the detection by the first early detection means is performed, a preceding opening effect suggesting that the first application is performed can be derived. game machine.

According to the means C-3, when the game ball is detected by the first early detection means installed in the first ball entry route, it is possible to derive the advance opening effect suggesting that the first award is performed. Since it is configured, for example, when a game ball enters a specific area in a single shot and further enters the first ball entry route, the first grant is decided at this point (as a player, the first 2 It is possible that he is somewhat disappointed because he is not in the special game state), but it takes a relatively long time for the game ball to pass through the first ball entry route, and it is difficult to give the first ball. can be avoided. Therefore, it takes too much time (no reaction) from when the first award is practically determined until the first award is made, slowing down the tempo of the game and reducing interest. Such situations can be prevented.

Means C-4. When the first grant and the second grant are performed, the first grant and the second grant are performed at the beginning of the first grant and the second grant. An opening production was held to teach that
When the detection by the first type ball detection means and the second type ball detection means is performed,
When the preceding opening effect is not performed, the first application or the second application of the first opening pattern in which the opening effect is performed for a first time is started,
In a state where the preceding opening effect is being performed, the opening effect is performed for a second time shorter than the first time, or the first application of a second opening pattern in which the opening effect is omitted, or , the gaming machine according to means C-3, wherein the second award is started.

According to the means C-4, when the preceding opening effect is being performed, the opening effect of the first time is further performed, thereby preventing the opening effect from becoming too long. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably avoid problems such as deterioration of the tempo of the game.

Means C-5. entry detection means for detecting all game balls (immediately after) entering the specific area on the upstream side of the first ball entry route and the second ball entry route;
The number of game balls in the specific area can be counted, the value is added based on the detection by the entry detection means, and the detection by the first early detection means and the second type entrance detection means. The gaming machine according to means C-3 or C-4, further comprising a first counting means for subtracting a value based on.

According to the means C-5, for example, it is determined whether or not a ball jam has occurred in the specific area, or if game balls exist in the specific area in addition to the game balls detected by the early detection means. It is possible to determine whether or not Therefore, it is possible to perform error processing caused by ball jamming, improve the accuracy of the preceding opening effect, increase the amount of information of the preceding opening effect, and improve the game performance and performance. .

Means C-6. When the detection by the early detection means is performed, the downstream side of the entry detection means and the upstream side of the early detection means and the second type entrance detection means are based on the value of the first count means. It is determined whether or not a game ball exists in a certain area on the side, and if it is determined that it does not exist, the preceding opening effect is derived, and if it is determined that it exists, (not the preceding opening effect) The game according to means C-5, further comprising promotion accepting state teaching means for teaching that the game ball is in a promotion accepting state in which the possibility of a game ball entering the second ball entry route remains. machine.

According to means C-6, for example, when two game balls enter the specific area and the preceding game ball enters the first ball entry route, the first award is not yet determined. , the player can be made to surely recognize that there is still a possibility of the second giving unless the subsequent game ball enters the first ball entering route. Therefore, it is possible to have a more reliable understanding of the game characteristics, and in the case of a situation like the above example, the behavior of subsequent game balls, the continuous entry of game balls into a specific area, etc. You can get them to take a stronger interest in you.

Means C-7. and second counting means for adding a value based on detection by the early detection means and subtracting a value based on detection by the first type entering ball detection means. - The gaming machine according to any one of -3 to C-6.

According to the means C-7, for example, it is possible to determine whether or not the first ball entry route is clogged with balls. Therefore, it is possible to perform error processing caused by ball jamming, improve the accuracy of the preceding opening effect, increase the amount of information of the preceding opening effect, and improve the game performance and performance. .

Means C-8. In the specific area,
a first guide passage that constitutes the first ball entry route that leads the game ball to the first type ball entry means;
a second guide passage that constitutes the second ball entry route that leads the game ball to the second type ball entry means;
A type sorting means for guiding the game ball that has entered the specific area to the first guide path or the second guide path is provided,
A covering means arranged to cover the front of the first guide passage (reducing the visibility of the first guide passage) is provided,
The game machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-7, wherein the visibility of the game ball changes before and after the game ball enters the first guide path.

According to the means C-8, the entrance of the first guide passage can be regarded as the entrance of the first type ball entering means. Therefore, basically, it is possible to make it easier to understand the premise of the game property that if the ball enters the entrance of the first guide passage, the first award is performed. In addition, it is possible to suppress deterioration of the design and the appearance of a complicated specific area by visually recognizing the first guide passage having a shape that delays the game ball.

Means C-9. The means C-1 to C-8 according to any one of means C-1 to C-8, characterized in that an entrance display section indicating each entrance of the first ball entry route and the second ball entry route is provided so as to be visible from the front. game machine.

According to the means C-9, the locations of the entrances of the first ball entry route and the second ball entry route are clarified, and game characteristics such as which of the first ball entry route and the second ball entry route the game ball enters can be made easier to understand. Incidentally, the entrance display section may be configured so as to be changeable based on the detection information of the early detection means. In this case, it is possible to make it easier to determine whether or not the game ball has entered the corresponding entering ball route.

Means C-10. In the specific area,
a first guide passage that constitutes the first ball entry route that leads the game ball to the first type ball entry means;
a second guide passage that constitutes the second ball entry route that leads the game ball to the second type ball entry means;
A type sorting means for guiding the game ball that has entered the specific area to the first guide path or the second guide path is provided,
The type sorting means is changeable between a stationary state in which the game balls that have reached the type sorting means are held in the type sorting means, and a guiding state in which the game balls are guided to the first guide path or the second guide path. and a state change between the stop state and the guidance state every predetermined time or based on a predetermined trigger,
The type sorting means includes a stationary portion in which the game ball is stationary in the stationary state,
The stationary portion includes a first stationary portion in which the stationary game ball is guided to the first guide passage when the type sorting means is in the guiding state, and a stationary game ball is guided to the first guiding path. 2 a second stopping portion guided to the guide passage,
The first ball-entering route is composed of the first guiding passage and the first stopping portion, and the second ball-entering route is composed of the second guiding passage and the second stopping portion,
The early detection means is
A first standby detection means (first early detection means) for detecting a game ball stopped at the first stopping portion;
A second standby detection means for detecting the game ball stopped at the second stopping part,
Any one of means C-1 to C-9, wherein the early teaching means is configured to be able to teach information about detection information by the first standby detection means and the second standby detection means. The gaming machine described in .

According to the means C-10, in the stationary state of the type sorting means, based on the detection information of the standby detection means, for example, if the type sorting means is currently in the guiding state, the game ball is guided to the second guide path. It is possible to teach that (the second award is performed) or that currently the game ball is only guided to the first guide path (the first award is performed). becomes. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance in the stationary state of the type sorting means, and improve the entertainment.

It should be noted that ``when the game ball is parked in the second parking portion, the type sorting means is placed in the guide state regardless of whether or not the game ball is parked in the first parking portion. As a result, the game ball stopped at the second stopping portion is guided to the second guide passage, and the second giving is performed based on the detection of the second type incoming ball detecting means. good.

D. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, pachinko machines and the like are known as one type of gaming machines. A pachinko machine has a game area in which a game is played using game balls, the game balls are movable, and the game balls shot by the shooting means are guided to the game area.

Further, the pachinko machine is provided with specific ball entry means having a specific area into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, and the game ball enters the starting ball entry means provided in the game area. Then, when the specific ball entry means is in an open state that allows the game ball to enter the specific area, and the game ball that has entered the specific area enters the special ball entry means in the same area, There is also a special game state that is advantageous to the player (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 11-197312).

By the way, in the middle of the special game state, or in a state where the right of the special game state has been obtained, even if the game ball enters the special ball entry means, a further (for that amount) special game state is granted. not. In other words, even if a relatively rare phenomenon such as a plurality of game balls continuously entering the special ball entry means occurs, the right to be granted the special game state is only once, and the player loses. , and the impression that it is a waste. As a result, there is a concern that the player will not be happy to let go even though a favorable situation for the player, such as the provision of a special game state, has arrived.

The present invention has been made to solve the problems exemplified above, and its object is to suppress the decline in interest caused by a plurality of game balls entering the special ball entry means. to provide the machine.

Means D-0. a game area in which game balls shot by the shooting means are guided;
a specific ball entry means having a specific area into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter;
The specific ball entry means is
In a state where a game ball exists in the specific area, another game ball can enter the specific area,
In the specific area,
A first type ball entering means that can enter a game ball, and a second type ball entering means,
a first type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first type ball entry means;
a second type ball entry detection means for detecting a gaming ball that has entered the second type ball entry means;
When the game ball is detected by the first type entering ball detection means, the first award is performed,
In a gaming machine in which, when a game ball is detected by the second type entering ball detection means, a second award that is more advantageous to the player than the first award is performed,
In the specific area,
a first guide passage for leading the game ball to the first type ball entry means;
a second guide passage for leading the game ball to the second type ball entry means;
A type sorting means for guiding the game ball to the first guide path or the second guide path is provided,
The type sorting means distributes the game balls to the above-mentioned number when simultaneously distributing n game balls, which is more than m, than in the case of simultaneously distributing m game balls that have reached the type distributing means. 2. A gaming machine characterized in that it is constructed so as to increase the ratio of guidance to the guide path.

Means D-1. a game area in which game balls shot by the shooting means are guided;
a specific ball entry means having a specific area into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter;
The specific ball entry means is
In a state where a game ball exists in the specific area, another game ball can enter the specific area,
In the specific area,
A first type ball entering means that can enter a game ball, and a second type ball entering means,
a first type ball entry detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first type ball entry means;
a second type ball entry detection means for detecting a gaming ball that has entered the second type ball entry means;
When the game ball is detected by the first type entering ball detection means, the first award is performed,
In a gaming machine in which, when a game ball is detected by the second type entering ball detection means, a second award that is more advantageous to the player than the first award is performed,
In the specific area,
a first guide passage for leading the game ball to the first type ball entry means;
a second guide passage for leading the game ball to the second type ball entry means;
A type sorting means for guiding the game ball to the first guide path or the second guide path is provided,
The type sorting means is changeable between a stationary state in which the game balls that have reached the type sorting means are held in the type sorting means, and a guiding state in which the game balls are guided to the first guide path or the second guide path. and a state change between the stop state and the guidance state every predetermined time or based on a predetermined trigger,
The type sorting means includes a stationary portion in which the game ball is stationary in the stationary state,
The stationary portion includes a first stationary portion in which the stationary game ball is guided to the first guide passage when the type sorting means is in the guiding state, and a stationary game ball is guided to the first guiding path. 2 a second stopping portion guided to the guide passage,
When the game ball is parked in the second parking portion, regardless of whether or not the game ball is parked in the first parking portion, the type sorting means is placed in the guidance state, A gaming machine characterized in that the game ball parked in the second parking portion is guided to the second guide passage, and the second award is performed based on detection by the second type incoming ball detection means. .

According to the means D-1, for example, when the game ball is parked in both the first parking portion and the second parking portion, the classification sorting means is brought into the guiding state, so that the ball is guided to the second guide passage. A second award is performed based on the detection of the second type of incoming ball detecting means. For this reason, for example, although the game ball stopped at the second stopping part was guided to the second guide path, the game ball stopped at the first stopping part was also guided to the first guide path, It is possible to avoid the occurrence of an unfavorable phenomenon such that the second application is not performed (the first application is performed). Therefore, it is possible to secure an easy-to-understand game property that the game ball should be stopped at the second stopping part and the game ball should be guided to the second guide passage. ) can be clarified.

Furthermore, it is easier to park the game balls in the second parking portion by allowing a large number of game balls to enter the specific area of the specific ball entry means, and there is no need to fear that the game balls will be parked in the first parking portion. Therefore, it is possible to associate a large number of game balls entering the specific area with an advantage for the player. Therefore, it is possible to completely eliminate the negative image of entering the game ball into the specific area of the specific ball entering means, and to increase the gaming property of allowing the game ball to enter the specific area as much as possible. can enjoy.

It should be noted that "in the state in which the first grant is determined and the state in which the second grant is determined, the first type entrance detection means and the second type entrance detection means is detected, the corresponding first application and second application are not performed."

Further, the structure is not limited to one-to-one correspondence between the first stop portion and the second stop portion and the first guide passage and the second guide passage. It is only necessary to have a configuration in which it is determined whether or not the game ball is guided to the second guide path depending on the arrangement or the number of game balls present. For example, there may be stationary portions A, B, and C, and the stationary portions A and B may correspond to the first stationary portion, and the stationary portion C may correspond to the second stationary portion. B exists, and if the game ball is parked only in one of the parking portions A and B, the game ball is guided to the first guide passage, and in that case, the game ball is parked. The stationary portions A and B correspond to the first stationary portion, and when the game ball is stationary in both the stationary portions A and B, the game ball is guided to the second guide passage, in which case, The stationary portions A and B may be configured to correspond to the second stationary portion.

Means D-2. The gaming machine according to means D-1, wherein the first retaining portion and the second retaining portion are formed in a concave shape capable of accommodating game balls in the stationary state of the type sorting means.

According to the means D-2, the game ball parked in the first parking portion and the second parking portion can be more reliably held (positioned) in the first parking portion and the second parking portion. Therefore, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not the game ball is guided to the second guide path while the game ball is stopped by the type sorting means. In addition, it is possible to make it easier to recognize that the game ball is guided to the second guide path, as compared with the configuration in which the game ball enters the second guide path by flow without stopping. Furthermore, the player can fully enjoy the state that the game ball is guided to the second guide path, and can more carefully visually recognize how the game ball is guided to the second guide path. Therefore, it is possible to secure the game property such as joy and sorrow at the state that the game balls are stopped by the type sorting means.

Means D-3. a first standby detection means for detecting a game ball stopped at the first stopping portion;
A second standby detection means for detecting a game ball stopped at the second stopping portion;
The gaming machine according to means D-1 or D-2, further comprising: a standby teaching means capable of teaching information regarding detection information by the first standby detection means and the second standby detection means. .

According to the means D-3, in the stationary state of the type sorting means, based on the detection information of the standby detection means, for example, if the type sorting means is currently in the guiding state, the game ball is guided to the second guide path. It is possible to teach that (the second award is performed) or that currently the game ball is only guided to the first guide path (the first award is performed). becomes. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance in the stationary state of the type sorting means, and improve the entertainment.

In particular, when the stationary game ball is positioned as in the above means D-2, when the game ball is stationary in the first stationary portion or the second stationary portion, the game ball is placed in the first position. It is determined which of the guiding path or the second guiding path the passenger is guided to, and the accuracy of teaching based on the detection information of the standby detection means is improved. Therefore, the above effects can be achieved more reliably.

Means D-4. When the game ball is detected by the first type entering ball detecting means, the first game state is given as the first giving,
When a game ball is detected by the second type entering ball detection means, a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state is given as the second provision,
In the state in which the provision of the first game state is determined, the state in which the provision of the second game state is determined, the first game state, and the second game state, the first type ball is entered. Even if the detection means and the second type entrance detection means are detected, the corresponding first grant and the second grant are not performed,
According to any one of means D-1 to D-3, the first guide path is configured so that the time required for the game ball to pass through is longer than that of the second guide path. game machine.

According to the means D-4, when the game balls are parked in the first parking portion and the second parking portion and the classification sorting means is in the guidance state, the game balls parked in the first parking portion is detected by the first type entered ball detection means, the game ball parked in the second parking portion is detected by the second type entered ball detection means. Therefore, the function and effect of the means D-1, such as allowing the player to enjoy the playability of allowing as many game balls as possible to enter the specific area, can be achieved more reliably.

By adopting this configuration, when the game ball is parked in both the first parking portion and the second parking portion, the game ball parked in the first parking portion enters the first guide passage. Even if it is allowed to do so, since the second grant can be performed, for example, when the game ball is parked in both the first parking portion and the second parking portion, it has been parked in the first parking portion There is no need to separately provide a structure for preventing game balls from entering the first guide passage.

Means D-5. The second parking portion is arranged downstream of the first parking portion, and the game ball is parked in the first parking portion, thereby allowing the game ball to reach the second parking portion. A gaming machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-4, characterized in that it is configured to be stationary.

According to the means D-5, by making a plurality of game balls reach the type sorting means, the player can enjoy stepping up so as to be advantageous to the player. In addition, it is possible to obtain a good impression that the game ball is parked in the first parking section.

Means D-6. The type sorting means includes a sorting section that guides the game balls stopped by the stopping means to the first guide path or the second guide path when the type sorting means is in the guiding state,
When the number of game balls stopped by the stopping means is m, all the stopped game balls are guided to the first guide path by the sorting unit,
When the number of game balls parked by the parking means is n, which is larger than the m, at least one of the parked game balls is guided to the second guide path by the sorting section. The gaming machine according to means D-1 or D-2, characterized by:

According to the means D-6, it is determined whether or not a game ball guided to the second guide path appears, depending on the number of game balls parked by the type sorting means in the parked state. In other words, the player plays the game with the goal of causing n game balls to stay in the sorting means. Therefore, the function and effect of the above means D-1, such as allowing the player to enjoy the playability of allowing as many game balls as possible to enter the specific area, can be achieved more reliably. Furthermore, by allowing a plurality of game balls to reach the sorting means, the player can enjoy stepping up in an advantageous manner.

In addition, in this means, when at least one of the parked game balls is guided to the second guide path by setting the classification sorting means to the guiding state, those game balls are not parked. When the stationary part (resultingly) corresponds to the second stationary part, the classification sorting means is set to the guiding state, and all the stationary game balls are guided to the first guide path. , the parking portion where those game balls were parked (resultingly) corresponds to the first parking portion.

Means D-7. The retaining portion is formed in a concave shape capable of accommodating game balls one by one in the retaining state of the type sorting means,
A standby detection means for detecting a game ball parked in the parking portion is provided corresponding to each of the parking portions,
The game according to means D-6, further comprising a teaching means capable of teaching information about the number of game balls parked in the type sorting means based on the detection information of the standby detection means. machine.

According to the means D-7, it is possible to reliably grasp the number of stationary game balls and the like by the standby detection means. Then, it is possible to perform an effect that the number of parked game balls reaches n, or that the number of parked game balls is still (how many) is not enough until the number of parked game balls reaches n, thereby improving the performance. etc. can be achieved.

Means D-8. An arrival detection means for detecting a game ball that enters the specific area and always reaches the type sorting means,
The stopping means is set to a driving state when the arrival detection means detects the arrival,
Any one of means D-1 to D-7, characterized in that, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, the type sorting means is stopped at a reference position at which the stationary state is set. The game machine described.

According to the means D-8, as in the case where the stopping means continues to operate and the type distributing means changes between the stationary state and the guiding state, the game balls reaching the type distributing means are not stopped, and the type distributing means is operated. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a case occurs when passing through. Therefore, it is possible to more reliably enjoy the real pleasure of enjoying the state of the game balls staying in the sorting means. In addition, while saving energy, it is possible to give a special feeling when the stopping means is driven.

In addition, there are an effective state in which the detection by the first type entering ball detecting means and the second type entering ball detecting means is effective, and an invalid state in which the detection is disabled. When the detection by the ball detection means is performed, the state is switched to the invalid state, the first application or the second application is performed, and the game ball is lost in the specific area, the valid state is set. It may be switched.

The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

a. The game machine in each of the above means is a pinball game machine. As a more detailed example of the aspect, "an operating means (game ball shooting handle) operated by a player, a shooting means (shooting motor, etc.) for flipping and shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the shooting means. A pinball game machine provided with a game area in which a game ball is guided and each ball entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, operation opening, etc.) arranged in the game area.

b. The game machine in each of the above means is a pinball game machine having a game area extending in a substantially vertical direction. As a more detailed example of the aspect, "an operating means (game ball shooting handle) operated by a player, a shooting means (shooting motor, etc.) for flipping and shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the shooting means. A predetermined game area (for example, the game area is composed of a game board surface, etc.) that guides the game balls and extends along a substantially vertical direction, and each ball entry means (general winning opening, variable winning device, operation port, etc.), and configured to enable visual recognition of the behavior of the game ball flowing down the game area.

c. The game machine or each pinball game machine in each of the above means is a pachinko machine or a game machine conforming to a pachinko machine.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Pachinko machine 33a, 33b... Starting winning device 33c... Opening/closing member 37... Central winning unit 42... Decorative pattern display device 43... Special display device 224a, 224b... Starting winning switch 261... Main controller , 262... sub-controller, 401... specific region, 403... entrance opening, 404... blade member, 410... rotating body unit, 414... rotating body, 416... pocket portion, 416a... special pocket portion, 427... safe passage , 428... Out passage, 437... Entered ball count switch, 461... Special entered ball detection switch, 462... Non-special entered ball detection switch.

Claims (1)

a state in which the first result is awaited;
a state in which a second result is awaited and
the second result is a more advantageous result for the player than the first result;
Both the first result and the second result may be in a wait state,
teaching that the first result is awaited in a state in which the first result is awaited and the second result is not awaited; a first waiting teaching means capable of teaching that both the first result and the second result are waiting in a state where both are waiting;
without teaching that the first result is awaited in a state in which the first result is awaited and the second result is not awaited, the first result and the second result and a second waiting teaching means capable of teaching that the second result is waiting, not that the first result is waiting, in a state where both are waiting,
Dissolving means for resolving the waiting state of the first result and the waiting state of the second result;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the canceling means is brought into a stopped state after the operation of canceling the waiting state of the first result and the waiting state of the second result .

Images